C5 Dag (2008) - Automotive CITROEN - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free C5 Dag (2008) CITROEN in PDF.
| Product Type | Automobile |
| Brand | Citroën |
| Model | C5 Dag (2008) |
| Engine Options | 1.6L HDi 110 hp, 2.0L HDi 140 hp, 2.0L HDi 138 hp, 2.2L HDi 173 hp, 3.0L V6 HDi 240 hp |
| Transmission | Manual 5-speed, Manual 6-speed, Automatic 6-speed |
| Fuel Type | Diesel |
| Fuel Tank Capacity | Approximately 71 litres |
| Kerb Weight (approx.) | 1,560 - 1,877 kg (depending on engine and body style) |
| Seating Capacity | 5 |
| Air Conditioning | Automatic dual-zone or mono-zone climate control |
| Instrument Panel | Central display with trip computer, maintenance indicator, navigation info |
| Bluetooth Connectivity | Hands-free phone and audio streaming (A2DP) |
| USB/Aux Input | USB port and auxiliary jack for portable devices |
| Seat Adjustments | Manual or electric (height, backrest, lumbar, heated) with memory function |
| Exterior Mirrors | Electrically adjustable, folding, heated, with auto-tilt in reverse |
| Safety Features | ABS, ESP/ASR, electronic parking brake, airbags (front, side, curtain), seat belt reminders |
| Engine Oil Capacity (with filter) | 3.75 - 5.25 litres depending on engine |
| Maintenance Interval | Indicated by maintenance spanner; reset procedure available |
| Boot Capacity (Saloon) | Not specified in manual, but typical C5 saloon approx. 470 litres |
| Wheels and Tyres | Spare wheel under boot floor; tyre pressures indicated on driver's door pillar |
Frequently Asked Questions - C5 Dag (2008) CITROEN
User questions about C5 Dag (2008) CITROEN
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Automotive in PDF format for free! Find your manual C5 Dag (2008) - CITROEN and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. C5 Dag (2008) by CITROEN.
USER MANUAL C5 Dag (2008) CITROEN
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
1
PETROL - DIESEL MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC GEARBOX INSTRUMENT PANELS
Panel grouping together the dials and vehicle operation indicator and warning lights.
A. Fuel gauge
B. Indicator:
• Coolant temperature
- Cruise control/Speed limiter information
C. Speed indicator
D. Rev counter
E. Indicator:
• Engine oil temperature
• Gear selector position and gear engaged (Automatic gearbox)
F. Controls:
- Lighting rheostat
- Resetting to zero of trip mileage computer and maintenance indicator
G. Instrument panel screen indicating:
- Depending on the page selected with the left-hand control knob on the steering wheel:
- Digital speed
- Trip computer
- Navigation (guidance) information
- Display of message alerts
- Engine oil level check
- Maintenance indicator
- Permanently:
- Trip mileage recorder
- Total mileage recorder
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
The instrument panel A is located in the centre of the dashboard.
- With the vehicle stationary, you can access the main menu of the instrument panel by quickly pressing on the left-hand rotating control B on the steering wheel.
- Whilst driving, the message "Action impossible whilst driving" is displayed on the instrument panel if you try to open the main menu.
The main menu allows you to programme certain vehicle and instrument panel functions:
"Choice of units" menu
This allows you to choose metric or imperial units.
"Choice of language" menu
This allows you to choose the display and voice recognition language.
"Vehicle parameters" menu
This allows you to access the parameters relating to:
- The vehicle lighting.
- The comfort levels in the vehicle.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
1
"Lighting" menu
Once you have selected this menu, you can:
Activate/deactivate the lighting of the daytime-running lamps.
Activate/deactivate the guide-me-home lighting and adjust its duration.
Activate/deactivate the dual-function Xenon directional head-lamps.
"Comfort" menu
Once you have selected this menu, you can:
Activate/deactivate the driver's welcome lighting function.
Select the unlocking of all the doors or just the driver's door.
Activate/deactivate the automatic engaging of the electronic parking brake.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
TRIP COMPUT
System which provides current information concerning the route travelled (range, consumption, etc.)
Data displays
the instrument panel display.
Turn the left-hand dial A on the steering wheel to display the various trip computer tabs in succession:
- the current information tab is displayed in zone B of the instrument panel, with:
- the range,
• the current consumption, - the route "1" tab is displayed in zone C of the instrument panel, with:
• the distance travelled,
• the average consumption, - the average speed, or the first route.
- the route "2" tab is displayed in zone C of the instrument panel, with:
• the distance travelled,
• the average consumption,
• the average speed,
for the second route.
Route zero reset The trip computer is dis
When the route required is displayed, press the left-hand dial on the steering wheel for more than two seconds.
The routes "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical.
Route "1" permits, for example, daily calculations, and route "2" monthly calculations.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
1
A few definitions...
Range
(km or miles)
This indicates the distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank in relation to the average consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled.
This figure may increase following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a significant change in the current consumption.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Current consumption
(l/100 km or km/l or mpg)
This is the average quantity of fuel consumed during the last few seconds.
This function is only displayed from 20 mph (30 km/h).
Average consumption
(l/100 km or km/l or mpg)
This is the average quantity of fuel consumed since the last trip computer zero reset.
Distance travelled
(km or miles)
This indicates the distance travelled since the last trip computer zero reset.
Average speed
(km/h or mph)
This is the average speed calculated since the last trip computer zero reset (ignition on).
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Return to the main instrument panel screen display
Successive rotations of the left-hand control knob on the steering wheel allow you to return to the main instrument panel screen display (vehicle speed), via the navigation information screen, then the screen displaying only the total mileage and the trip mileage (bottom of screen).
Log of alerts
This function allows you to display the log of alerts.
Press on button A.
The following messages appear consecutively on the instrument panel screen:
- Tyre pressure check.
- Maintenance indicator reminder.
- Display of message alerts.
- Oil level check.
Display of navigation information on instrument panel screen
You can display navigation information on the instrument panel screen by rotating the left-hand knob on the steering wheel.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Return to the main instrument panel screen display
Successive rotations of the left-hand control knob on the steering wheel allow you to return to the main instrument panel screen display (vehicle speed), via the navigation information screen, then the screen displaying only the total mileage and the trip mileage (bottom of screen).
Log of alerts
This function allows you to display the log of alerts.
Press on button A.
The following messages appear consecutively on the instrument panel screen:
- Tyre pressure check.
- Maintenance indicator reminder.
- Display of message alerts.
- Oil level check.
Display of navigation information on instrument panel screen
You can display navigation information on the instrument panel screen by rotating the left-hand knob on the steering wheel.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
1
Indicator and warning lights
Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation (operation or deactivation indicator lights) or of the occurrence of a fault (warning light).
When the ignition is switched on
The warning lights come on for a few seconds when the vehicle's ignition is switched on.
When the engine is started, these warning lights should switch off.
Operation indicator lights
- Front fog lamps.
- Left-hand direction indicator.
- Side lights.
- Main beam headlamps.
- Dipped headlamps.
- Right-hand direction indicator.
- Rear fog lamps.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Wait until this is switched off before operating the starter.
Deactivation warning lights
If one of the following warning lights comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
Passenger's air bag system deactivation
The passenger's air bag system is put into service automatically when the vehicle is started.
A specific control, located in the glove box, permits deactivation of the system. This is confirmed by continuous lighting of this warning light on the instrument panel or a message on the multifunction screen.
Front passenger's airbag activation
If this comes on temporarily when the ignition is switched on, it indicates that the front passenger's airbag is active.
Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR) deactivation
The ESP/ASR system is put into service automatically when the vehicle is started.
A specific button, located in the centre of the fascia, permits deactivation of the system. This is confirmed by continuous lighting of this warning light and of the indicator light on the button.
From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h), the system is reactivated automatically.
Warning lights Diesel engine pre-heating
-1
When the engine is running or the vehicle is moving, the lighting of one of the following warning lights indicates the occurrence of a fault requiring intervention on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the displaying of a warning light must be the subject of further diagnostics by reading the associated message on the multifunction display.
Should you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN dealer.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Wait until this is switched off before operating the starter.
Deactivation warning lights
If one of the following warning lights comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
Passenger's air bag system deactivation
The passenger's air bag system is put into service automatically when the vehicle is started.
A specific control, located in the glove box, permits deactivation of the system. This is confirmed by continuous lighting of this warning light on the instrument panel or a message on the multifunction screen.
Front passenger's airbag activation
If this comes on temporarily when the ignition is switched on, it indicates that the front passenger's airbag is active.
Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR) deactivation
The ESP/ASR system is put into service automatically when the vehicle is started.
A specific button, located in the centre of the fascia, permits deactivation of the system. This is confirmed by continuous lighting of this warning light and of the indicator light on the button.
From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h), the system is reactivated automatically.
Warning lights Diesel engine pre-heating
-1
When the engine is running or the vehicle is moving, the lighting of one of the following warning lights indicates the occurrence of a fault requiring intervention on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the displaying of a warning light must be the subject of further diagnostics by reading the associated message on the multifunction display.
Should you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN dealer.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Wait until this is switched off before operating the starter.
Deactivation warning lights
If one of the following warning lights comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
Passenger's air bag system deactivation
The passenger's air bag system is put into service automatically when the vehicle is started.
A specific control, located in the glove box, permits deactivation of the system. This is confirmed by continuous lighting of this warning light on the instrument panel or a message on the multifunction screen.
Front passenger's airbag activation
If this comes on temporarily when the ignition is switched on, it indicates that the front passenger's airbag is active.
Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR) deactivation
The ESP/ASR system is put into service automatically when the vehicle is started.
A specific button, located in the centre of the fascia, permits deactivation of the system. This is confirmed by continuous lighting of this warning light and of the indicator light on the button.
From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h), the system is reactivated automatically.
Warning lights Diesel engine pre-heating
-1
When the engine is running or the vehicle is moving, the lighting of one of the following warning lights indicates the occurrence of a fault requiring intervention on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the displaying of a warning light must be the subject of further diagnostics by reading the associated message on the multifunction display.
Should you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN dealer.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Central alert
Lighting is associated with another warning light:
- punctured wheel,
- braking,
- coolant temperature,
stop the vehicle immediately and as safely as possible.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Service
If this warning light comes on, it indicates the occurrence of a problem in one of the
systems which does not have a specifi c warning light.
In order to identify it, consult the message on the multifunction display.
The warning light only comes on temporarily in the case of the following minor faults:
- incorrect closing of the doors, boot, rear screen and bonnet,
- fl at remote control battery,
- insufficient tyre pressure,
- the saturation of the particle emission fi Iter (Diesel).
In the case of major faults, the warning light remains on until the operating fault is rectified, contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
Braking
If this comes on, it indicates the occurrence of a fault in one of the braking systems:
- signifi cant drop in the level in the circuit,
- electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) faulty (simultaneous lighting of the ABS warning light),
stop the vehicle immediately and as safely as possible.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
If this comes on, it indicates the occurrence of a fault in the anti-lock braking system.
However, this does not prevent operation of the vehicle's assisted braking.
Parking brake
When stationary, the permanent lighting of this warning lamp confi rms that the parking brake is applied.
If this warning lamp flashes, it indicates a fault with its application or release. Consult a CITROEN dealer.
With the engine running, and when displayed at the same time as the STOP warning lamp, it indicates that the brake fluid level is too low.
If this warning lamp comes on, stop immediately and contact a CITROËN dealer.
Electronic parking brake fault
This warning lamp comes on if there is a fault with the electronic parking brake.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Electronic parking brake - deactivation of automatic functions
This warning lamp comes on if the "automatic locking" (upon switching off the ignition) and the "automatic unlocking" functions are deactivated or faulty.
Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR)
The ESP/ASR system is put into service automatically when the vehicle is started.
Unless the system has been deactivated, if this warning light comes on continuously, accompanied by a message on the instrument panel screen, switching on of the SERVICE warning light and an audible signal, this indicates the occurrence of a fault in the ESP/ASR system.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Engine autodiagnostics system
If this comes on, it indicates the occurrence of a fault in the engine management system.
If it fl ashes, it indicates the occurrence of a fault in the emission control system.
Maximum coolant temperature
If this comes on, it indicates that the temperature in the cooling system is too high. Stop the vehicle immediately and as safely as possible.
Check the coolant level. If the level is low, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Fuel low
If this comes on, it indicates that the range remaining is approximately 30 miles (50 km).
It may be less than this in certain driving conditions and depending on the engine.
The capacity of the tank is approximately 71 litres.
Battery charge
If this comes on, it indicates the occurrence of a fault in the battery charging circuit (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt...).
Seat belt not fastened/unfastened \*
This warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel to remind the driver and all passengers that they must fasten their seat belt.
It is linked to the seat belt information given by the roof console.
Seat belt non-fastening/unfastening
This warning lamp informs you of the non-fastening and unfastening of the
driver and passenger seat belts.
The lit up positions represent the passengers whose seat belts are not fastened/unfastened.
Driver's seat belt not fastened:
- The warning lamp lights up between 0 and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 12 mph, it flashes accompanied by a sound signal for around 120 seconds.
Front and rear passenger seat belts not fastened:
- When the ignition is switched on, the points corresponding to the seat positions with seat belts not fastened remain lit up for 30 seconds.
Seat belts unfastened during the journey:
- The point corresponding to the seat position with seat belt unfastened lights up between 0 and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 12 mph, it flashes accompanied by a sound signal for around 120 seconds. The sound signal stops when the seat belt is re-fastened or if a door is opened.
* According to country.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
1
Maintenance indicator
System which informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is due is calculated from the last indicator zero reset. It is determined by two parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last service.
More than 620 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due.
Example: 1 900 miles remain before the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the display indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner is switched off; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The display then indicates the total and trip distances.
Less than 620 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due
Example: 500 miles remain before the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the display indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.
Service overdue
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible.
Example: the service is overdue by 300 miles.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the display indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains lit.
The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driver's driving habits.
Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the two year service interval.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Maintenance indicator zero reset
After each service, the maintenance indicator must be reset to zero.
Your CITROËN technician resets the indicator to zero after each service. However, if you do your own servicing, the procedure for resetting to zero is as follows:
switch off the ignition,
press and hold the trip distance recorder zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown,
when the display indicates "=0", release the button; the spanner disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and wait at least five minutes for the zero reset to be taken into account.
Engine oil level indicator
System which informs the driver of the validity or invalidity of the engine oil level.
This information is indicated for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, after the service information.
The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 15 minutes.
Oil level correct
Lack of oil
This is indicated by displaying of the message "Oil level incorrect".
If the lack of oil is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, it is essential that the level is topped up to prevent damage to the engine.
Oil level gauge fault
This is indicated by displaying of the message "Oil level measurement not valid". Consult a CITROËN dealer.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Maintenance indicator zero reset
After each service, the maintenance indicator must be reset to zero.
Your CITROËN technician resets the indicator to zero after each service. However, if you do your own servicing, the procedure for resetting to zero is as follows:
switch off the ignition,
press and hold the trip distance recorder zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown,
when the display indicates "=0", release the button; the spanner disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and wait at least five minutes for the zero reset to be taken into account.
Engine oil level indicator
System which informs the driver of the validity or invalidity of the engine oil level.
This information is indicated for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, after the service information.
The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 15 minutes.
Oil level correct
Lack of oil
This is indicated by displaying of the message "Oil level incorrect".
If the lack of oil is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, it is essential that the level is topped up to prevent damage to the engine.
Oil level gauge fault
This is indicated by displaying of the message "Oil level measurement not valid". Consult a CITROËN dealer.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
1
Engine oil temperature gauge
Under normal operating conditions, the bars should be within section 1. In severe operating conditions, the bars may extend into section 2.
In this event, slow down, and if necessary, stop the engine and check the levels (see corresponding chapter).
Coolant temperature indicator
Under normal operating conditions, the bars should be within section 1. In severe operating conditions, the bars may extend into section 2, the engine coolant temperature warning lamp A and the STOP warning lamp will light up, stop immediately. Switch off the ignition. The cooling fan may continue to operate for a certain time.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
If the SERVICE warning lamp lights up, check the levels (see corresponding chapter).
Fuel gauge indicator
On horizontal ground, the lighting of the fuel low warning lamp warns you that you are using the reserve tank. A message alert is displayed on the instrument panel.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Total distance recorder
System which measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle during its life.
The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Trip distance recorder
System which measures a distance travelled during a day or other period until it is reset to zero by the driver.
With the ignition on, press the button until zeros appear.
Lighting rheostat
System for manual adjustment of the brightness of the instruments and controls in relation to the exterior brightness.
Operation
Press button A to decrease the brightness of the instruments and controls.
Press button B to increase the brightness of the instruments and controls.
Deactivation
When the lights are off, or in day mode on vehicles fitted with daytime lights, pressing the buttons does not have any effect.
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
MULTIFUNCTION SCRE
Presentation
1. Time
-
Outside temperature
-
Date and display zone
When the outside temperature is between +3 °C and -3 °C, the temperature display fl ashes (ice risk).
The outside temperature displayed may be greater than the actual temperature, if the vehicle is parked in bright sunlight.
Controls
A. Access to the "Main Menu"
B. Cancellation of the operation or return to the previous display
C. Scrolling in the screen menus Validation at the steering wheel
D. Validation on the audio equipment control panel
Main Menu
Press on the button A to view the "Main Menu" of the multifunction screen. This menu gives you access to the following functions:
Personalisation-Configuration
This permits activation/deactivation of the:
- brightness and contrast of the multifunction screen,
- date and time,
- units of the outside temperature displayed.
Radio-CD
(see "Audio" chapter)
Bluetooth® hands-free kit
(see "Audio" chapter)
It is recommended that the driver should not manipulate the controls while the vehicle is in motion.
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
Adjusting the brightness and contrast
Press on A.
Use C to select the "Brightness - video adjustment" menu. Confi rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Select the configuration of the screen using C. Confirm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Select the brightness setting. Confi rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Select the inverse or normal display mode using C then validate with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment. To adjust the brightness select "+" or "-" and save your setting with a press on C.
Validate with "OK" on the screen.
Adjusting the date and the time
Press on A.
Use C to select the "Adjusting the date and time" menu, then confirm your choice with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Select the screen configuration using C. Confir rm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Select the adjustment for the date and the time, using B. Confirm with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Press C to select the values you wish to modify. Confirm your choice with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Validate with "OK" on the screen.
Choosing the units
Press on A.
Use C to select the "Choice of temperature units" menu, then confirm your choice with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Using C, select the unit then validate with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.
Validate with "OK" on the screen.
Selection of the type of information displayed (Mode)
Successive presses on the end of the wiper stalk or on the MODE button on the audio equipment permit selection of the type of information presented on the multifunction screen (date or radio, CD, MP3 CD, CD changer).
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
16/9 COLOUR DIS (WITH MYWAY)
Displays on the screen
It displays the following information automatically and directly:
- the time,
- the date,
- the altitude,
- the exterior temperature (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),
- the audio functions,
- the satellite navigation system information.
Controls
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and buttons (no visible text or symbols)From the MyWay control panel, to select one of the applications:
press the dedicated "RADIO", "MUSIC", "NAV", "TRAFFIC", "SETUP" or "PHONE" button to gain access to the corresponding menu,
turn the navigator to move the selection,
press the navigator to confirm the selection,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.
For further details concerning these applications, refer to the "Audio Equipment" section or to the specific user guide given to you with the other owner's documents.
"SETUP" menu
Press the "SETUP" button to gain access to the "SETUP" menu. This allows you to select from the following functions:
- "Languages",
- "Date and time",
- "Display",
- "Units",
- "System parameters".
Languages
This menu allows you to select the language used by the display: Deutsch, English, Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Polski, Portugues, Türkçe *.
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
Date and time
This menu allows you to set the date and time, the format of the date and the format of the time.
To set the date and time:
Press the "SETUP" control.
Turn the dial to select "DATE AND TIME".
Press the dial to confi rm.
Turn the dial to select "SET DATE AND TIME".
Press the dial to confirm.
Turn the dial to select a fi eld:
- C for the day,
- D for the month,
- E for the year,
- F for the time.
Press the dial to confirm.
Turn the dial or use the alphanumeric keypad to select the digits which form the date and time.
Press the dial to confirm each field.
Turn the dial to select "DATE FORMAT".
Choose the format required and press the dial to confirm.
Turn the dial to select "TIME FORMAT".
Choose the format required and press the dial to confirm.
Refer to the MyWay User Guide.
Units
This menu allows you to select the units: temperature (°C or °F) and distance (km or miles).
System parameters
This menu allows you to restore the factory configuration, display the software version and activate the scrolling text.
For safety reasons, it is imperative that configuration of the multifunction displays by the driver is carried out when stationary.
Display
This menu allows you to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
16/9 HIGH DEFINI
COLOUR DISPLAY
(WITH NAVIDRIVE 3D)
Displays on the screen
It displays the following information automatically and directly:
- the time,
- the date,
- the altitude,
- the exterior temperature (the value displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of ice),
- the audio functions,
- the telephone and address book information,
- the satellite navigation system information.
Controls
From the NaviDrive 3D control panel, to select one of the applications:
press the dedicated "RADIO", "MEDIA", "NAV", "TRAFFIC", "ADDR BOOK" or "SETUP" button to gain access to the corresponding menu,
turn the navigator to move the selection,
press the navigator to confirm the selection,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon the current operation and return to the previous display.
For further details concerning these applications, refer to the "Audio Equipment" section or to the specific user guide given to you with the other owner's documents.
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
"SETUP" menu
2
Press the "SETUP" button to gain access to the "SETUP" menu. This allows you to select from the following functions:
- "Languages and voice functions",
- "Date and time",
- "Display",
- "Units",
- "System parameters".
Languages and voice functions
This menu allows you to:
- select the language used by the display (Deutsch, English, Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Polski, Portugues, Türkçe *),
- select the voice recognition parameters (activation/deactivation, advice on use, personal voice programming, etc.),
- set the volume of the voice synthesiser.
Date and time
This menu allows you to set the date and time, the format of the date and the format of the time (refer to the "Audio Equipment" section or to the specific user guide given to you with the other owner's documents).
For safety reasons, it is imperative that configuration of the multifunction displays by the driver is carried out when stationary.
Display
This menu allows you to set the brightness of the screen, the screen colour scheme and the colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).
System parameters
This menu allows you to restore the factory configuration, display the software version and activate the scrolling text.
* According to country.
COMFORT
natural_image
Interior view of a car cockpit with labeled sections A, B, C, D (no text or symbols beyond labels)VENTILA
A. Sunshine sensor.
The air diffusion grille located in the centre of the dashboard provides optimum distribution of the air for the front seats.
This system eliminates unpleasant air currents while maintaining an optimum temperature in the passenger compartment.
To open the air diffusion grille, turn the dial upwards.
To close the air diffusion grille, turn the dial fully downwards.
In very hot weather, to obtain more satisfactory central and side ventilation, it is advisable to close the diffused air conditioning.
C. Cooled glove box.
D. Rear passenger vents.
COMFORT
VENTILATION, HE AND AIR CONDITIONING RECOMMENDATIONS
Air conditioning
We recommend use of the automatic regulation of the air conditioning.
It permits automatic and optimised control of all of the following functions: air flow, temperature in the passenger compartment and air distribution, by means of various sensors (exterior temperature, sunshine). This eliminates any need for you to change your settings other than the value displayed.
Please do not block the sunshine sensor A.
If you select the automatic mode (by pressing the "AUTO" control) and leave all of the vents open, optimum comfort will be maintained and humidity and condensation will be removed regardless of the exterior climatic conditions.
The temperature in the passenger compartment cannot be lower than the exterior temperature if the air conditioning is not on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning must be used with the windows closed. If the vehicle has been parked in the sun for a long period and the interior temperature is very high, ventilate the passenger compartment with the windows open for a few minutes, then close the windows.
To keep the air conditioning system in good working order it is essential that it is operated at least once a month.
The air conditioning uses the engine power during its operation. As a result, the fuel consumption of the vehicle increases.
In certain cases of particularly arduous use (e.g. towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures), switching off the air conditioning permits the recovery of engine power and therefore increases the towing capacity.
Air inlet
Check that the exterior grille for the air inlet, at the bottom of the windscreen, is clean and free of dead leaves, snow, etc.
When washing the vehicle using a high pressure nozzle, avoid spraying at the air inlet.
Air circulation
Maximum comfort is obtained by means of a good distribution of air in the passenger compartment, both in the front and in the rear.
To obtain a uniform distribution of air, take care not to block the exterior air intake grille located at the base of the windscreen, the vents, the air outlets under the front seats and the air extractor located behind the flaps in the boot.
The front and rear vents are fitted with thumbwheels to adjust the air flow and direction. We recommend that you leave all of the vents open.
Dust filter/Odour filter (active carbon)
There is a filter for excluding odours and dust.
This filter has to be changed in accordance with the vehicle maintenance schedule (see: "Maintenance and Warranty Guide").
COMFORT
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (
Mono zone: this is the overall regulation of the temperature, distribution and flow of air in the passenger compartment.
The symbols and messages associated with the automatic air conditioning controls appear on the multifunction display.
- Automatic operation
- Temperature adjustment
- Air distribution adjustment
- Activation/deactivation of the air conditioning
- Air flow adjustment
- Front demisting - de-icing
- Rear demisting - de-icing
- Air recirculation - intake of exterior air
- Display
1. Automatic operation
This is the normal system operating mode. In accordance with the level of comfort chosen, pressing this control, confirmed by the
switching on of indicator light A, permits automatic and simultaneous control of all of the following functions:
- Air flow.
- Temperature in the passenger compartment.
- Air distribution.
- Air intake.
- Air conditioning.
It is advisable to leave all of the vents open.
Simply pressing one of the controls, with the exception of control 2, switches the system to manual mode.
Indicator light A switches off.
2. Temperature adjustment
Turn control 2 to change the temperature:
- Clockwise to increase the temperature.
- Anticlockwise to reduce the temperature.
The setting required is displayed.
The value indicated on the display corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the choice of configuration validated on the display.
A setting around the value 21 usually makes it possible to obtain optimum comfort. However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is usual.
On entering the vehicle, the interior temperature may be much colder (or warmer) than is comfortable. There is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to obtain rapidly the level of comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air conditioning will use its maximum performance settings to correct the temperature difference as quickly as possible.
COMFORT
Control via the manual controls
It is possible to adjust one or more functions manually, while leaving the other functions in automatic mode.
Press one of the controls, with the exception of that which regulates the temperature 2. Indicator light A switches off.
Switching to manual mode may result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation) and is not advantageous to comfort.
To return to automatic mode, press the "AUTO" control.
3. Air distribution adjustment
Press the controls 3 to change the distribution of the air flow.
The indicator lights corresponding to the distribution chosen come on:
- Windscreen and front side windows.
- Front ventilation (central and side vents and air diffusion grille if open) and rear ventilation.
- Front and rear footwells.
Simultaneous displaying of the distribution of air to the windscreen and side windows and of front and rear ventilation is not possible.
4. Air conditioning
The air conditioning will only operate when the engine is running. The air blower control (air flow adjustment) must be active to obtain air conditioning.
Press control 4. Indicator light B comes on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning must be used with the windows closed.
Deactivating the air conditioning may result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation).
5. Air flow adjustment
Turn control 5 to the right to increase the air flow or to the left to reduce it.
The air flow level is indicated by the progressive lighting of the blocks of the bar graph on the control panel display 9.
To prevent condensation and deterioration of the quality of the air in the passenger compartment, ensure that an adequate flow of air is maintained.
Switching off the ventilation
Turn control 5 to the left until the flow of air stops.
The "OFF" symbol is displayed on the multifunction display.
This action switches off the display and the indicator lights.
It deactivates all of the system's functions, with the exception of the rear screen demisting.
The temperature-related comfort is no longer controlled (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation).
Avoid driving for too long with the air conditioning off.
To reactivate the air conditioning:
Press control 1.
6. Front demisting - de-icing
In certain cases, the "AUTO" mode may not be suffi cient to demist or de-ice the windows (humidity, several passengers, ice).
Press control 6 to clear the windows quickly. The indicator light comes on.
COMFORT
It controls the temperature, air flow and intake and distributes the ventilation to the windscreen and front side windows.
Resuming manual control exits from "Demisting" mode. It must be cancelled to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.
Once the inconvenience has been eliminated, pressing control 1 returns the system to "AUTO" mode.
7. Rear demisting - de-icing
The heated rear screen operates independently of the air conditioning system.
Press control 7, with the engine running, to demist the rear screen and the mirrors. The indicator light comes on.
Demisting is switched off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current and in relation to the exterior temperature.
It may be stopped by pressing control 7 again or when the engine is switched off.
However, demisting resumes when the engine is switched on again.
Switch off the rear screen and exterior mirrors demisting when you consider this necessary as low current consumption reduces fuel consumption.
8. Intake of exterior air/Recirculation of interior air
This function enables you to isolate the passenger compartment from exterior fumes and odours.
Press control 8 several times to set the air intake mode, the indicator light comes on.
It must be cancelled as soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.
- When starting with the engine cold, the flow will reach its optimum level gradually to prevent an excessive distribution of cold air.
- When entering the vehicle after it has been parked for a fairly long period, if the interior temperature is very different from your comfort setting there is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to quickly reach the level of comfort required. The system automatically uses its maximum performance to correct the difference in temperature as quickly as possible.
- The water resulting from the air conditioning condensation is discharged via an opening provided for this purpose; therefore, a puddle of water may form underneath the vehicle when stationary.
- In all seasons, if the weather is cool, the air conditioning is useful as it removes the humidity from the air and the condensation. Avoid driving for prolonged periods with the air conditioning switched off.
COMFORT
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (
Dual zone: this is the differentiated regulation of the temperature and air distribution on the driver's side and the front passenger side.
The driver and his front passenger can each adjust the temperature and the distribution of the air to suit their requirements.
The symbols and messages associated with the automatic air conditioning controls appear on the multifunction display.
1a. Automatic operation on the driver's side
1b. Automatic operation on the passenger's side
2a. Temperature adjustment on the driver's side
2b. Temperature adjustment on the passenger's side
3a. Air distribution adjustment on the driver's side
3b. Air distribution adjustment on the passenger's side
4a. Driver's zone display
4b. Passenger's zone display
5. Air flow adjustment
6. Activation/deactivation of the air conditioning
7. Air recirculation – intake of exterior air
8. Rear demisting-de-icing
9. Front demisting- de-icing
1a-1b. Automatic operation
This is the normal system operating mode. In accordance with the level of comfort chosen, pressing this control, confirmed by the dis-
playing of indicator light A, permits automatic and simultaneous control of all of the following functions:
- Air flow.
- Temperature in the passenger compartment.
- Air distribution.
- Air conditioning.
- Automatic air recirculation.
It is advisable to leave all of the vents open. Simply pressing one of the controls, with the exception of that which regulates the temperature 1a and 1b, switches the system to manual mode. Indicator light A switches off.
COMFORT
2a-2b. Temperature adjustment
Turn control 2a to change the temperature on the driver's side and control 2b to change the temperature on the passenger's side: to the right to increase the temperature or to the left to reduce it.
The setting required is displayed.
The value indicated on the display corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the choice of configuration validated on the display.
A setting around the value 21 usually makes it possible to obtain optimum comfort. However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is usual.
On entering the vehicle, the interior temperature may be much colder (or warmer) than is comfortable. There is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to quickly obtain the level of comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air conditioning will use its maximum performance settings to correct the temperature difference as quickly as possible.
Control via the manual controls
Press one of the controls, with the exception of those which regulate the temperature 2a and 2b. The indicator lights A on the "AUTO" controls switch off.
It is possible to adjust one or more functions manually while leaving the other functions in automatic mode.
Switching to manual mode may result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation) and is not advantageous to comfort.
To return to "AUTO" mode, press controls 1a and 1b. The indicator lights A come on.
3a-3b. Air distribution adjustment
Press control 3a to change the distribution of the air flow on the driver's side.
Press control 3b to change the distribution of the air flow on the passenger's side.
The indicator lights corresponding to the distribution chosen come on:
- Windscreen and front side windows.
- Front ventilation (central and side vents and air diffusion grille if open) and rear ventilation.
- Front and rear footwells.
Simultaneous displaying of the distribution of air to the windscreen and side windows and of front and rear ventilation is not possible.
COMFORT
5. Air flow adjustment
Press the control: - to increase the air flow, - to reduce the air flow.
The air flow level is indicated by the progressive lighting of the fan blade indicator lights.
Reducing the flow to minimum switches the air conditioning OFF.
To prevent condensation and deterioration of the quality of the air in the passenger compartment, ensure that an adequate flow of air is maintained.
6. Air conditioning
The air conditioning will only operate when the engine is running. The air blower control (air flow adjustment) must be active in
order to obtain air conditioning.
Press control 6. The indicator light comes on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning must be used with the windows closed.
7. Air recirculation - intake of exterior air
This function enables you to isolate the passenger compartment from exterior fumes and odours.
Intake of air in automatic anti-pollution mode
This is activated by default in automatic comfort regulation mode.
The automatic mode has an air quality sensor. It analyses the air and isolates the passenger compartment from the outside if it detects the presence of pollutants. In this case, it automatically activates the recirculation of the passenger compartment air.
This function does not detect unpleasant odours and therefore does not prevent them from entering the passenger compartment. It is not active when the exterior temperature is below +5 °C to avoid the risk of condensation forming inside the vehicle.
Closing the air intake
Press control 7 to close the exterior air intake.
While retaining the other settings, this position allows the driver to isolate himself from unpleasant exterior odours and fumes at any time.
It must be cancelled as soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.
Intake of exterior air
Press control 7 once to open the exterior air intake.
COMFORT
8. Rear demisting - de-icing
The heated rear screen operates independently of the air conditioning system.
Press control 8, with the engine running, to demist the rear screen and the mirrors. The indicator light comes on.
Demisting is switched off automatically to avoid an excessive consumption of current and in relation to the exterior temperature.
It may be stopped by pressing control 8 again or when the engine is switched off.
In this latter case, the demisting resumes if the engine is switched on again within one minute.
Switch off the rear screen and exterior mirrors demisting when you consider this necessary as low current consumption reduces fuel consumption.
9. Front demisting - de-icing
In certain cases, the "AUTO" mode may not be suffi cient to demist or de-ice the windows (humidity, several passengers, ice).
Press control 9 to clear the windows quickly. The indicator light comes on.
This system controls the temperature, air flow and intake and distributes the ventilation to the windscreen and front side windows.
Resuming manual control exits from the "Demisting" mode. It must be cancelled as soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.
Pressing one of the controls 1a and 1b returns the system to the "AUTO" mode.
When starting with the engine cold, the flow will reach its optimum level gradually to prevent an excessive distribution of cold air.
When entering the vehicle after it has been parked for a fairly long period, if the interior temperature is very different from your comfort setting there is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to quickly reach the level of comfort required. The system automatically uses its maximum performance to correct the difference in temperature as quickly as possible.
The water resulting from the air conditioning condensation is discharged via an opening provided for this purpose; therefore, a puddle of water may form underneath the vehicle when stationary.
In all seasons, if the weather is cool, the air conditioning is useful as it removes the humidity from the air and the condensation. Avoid driving for prolonged periods with the air conditioning switched off.
COMFORT
PROGRAMMABLE HEATING
With the engine off, programmable heating preheats the coolant circuit in order to optimise the engine operating temperature prior to starting.
The programmable heating system can be started immediately or delayed thanks to its programming function.
With the engine idle or the vehicle stationary, it is normal to hear a high-pitched whistling noise and to notice some smoke/emissions.
Digital programmer
The heating system's programmer is located on the left-hand side of the dashboard.
- Time or remaining functioning time.
- Increase (time).
- Select programme.
- Programme number selected.
- Immediate start-up of heating.
- Time adjustment and reading warning lamp.
- Reduce (time).
- Heating mode warning lamp.
- Programmable heating system warning lamp.
• LED lit: Activated.
• LED off: Deactivated.
Setting the time
Hold button 3 down and press button 2 or button 7. Release button 3, the time is displayed and symbol 6 flashes.
Use the two adjustment buttons 2 (to go forward) or 7 (to go back) until the correct time is displayed.
Holding these buttons down will make the numbers displayed scroll more quickly.
COMFORT
Adjusting the operating duration
Press button 3 and hold it down, press button 2 or 7 at the same time. Release button 3. The time and symbol 6 fl ash.
Press again on button 3 and hold it down, press button 2 or 7 at the same time. Release button 3.
The programmed operating duration is displayed and symbol 8 fl ashes.
Adjust the operating duration with button 2 or 7.
To memorise the setting, press button 3 or wait until the display goes off.
Adjusting the remaining operating duration
When the heating mode is active, the remaining operation duration can be modified by between 10 and 30 minutes using buttons 2 or 7.
Immediate start-up
Press button 5.
The screen displays the symbol 8 and the remaining operating duration. This can be adjusted. The maximum duration is 30 minutes.
The warning lamp 8 lights up and remains lit for the whole duration of the system's operation. The duration of the system's operation disappears after 10 seconds.
Programming the start-up time
Start-up of the heating system can be programmed between 1 minute and 24 hours in advance.
You can store up to three different start-up times, but programme only one delayed start-up time.
Factory settings A :
• Start time 1:06.00.
• Start time 2:16.00.
• Start time 3:22.00.
The factory settings are replaced once you adjust them. The programmed times are stored until they are reprogrammed.
Press button 3 several times until the programmed start-up time is displayed, then buttons 2 or 7, in the next 10 seconds until the desired start-up time is displayed.
Before programming the delayed start-up of the heating, you must ensure that the clock is set to the correct time.
COMFORT
Selection and activation of the programmed heating start-up time
3
Press button 3 several times until the programme number corresponding to the required programme time is displayed. The chosen pre-selected time is activated automatically after 10 seconds if no other buttons have been pressed.
To confirm that the mode is activated, symbols 4 and 8 flash until the heating starts up.
When the heating starts up, the warning lamp 9 lights up on the dashboard and the programmer screen.
Cancelling the current programme
Press button 3 briefly: the display of the start-up time goes off.
In the event of a battery failure, the factory settings are restored.
Stopping the heating system while operating
Press button 5.
The warning lamp 8 and the screen go out.
Reading the time
When a programme is operating, pressing button 2 or 7 displays the heating start-up time. A second press on these buttons displays the time.
When a programme is not operating, pressing button 2 or 7 displays the time.
When the heating is operating, the remaining operating duration is displayed instead of the time.
- The pre-selected start-up time can be modified or cancelled by following the instructions previously given above.
- In the event of a battery disconnection, the programmer must be reset (hours, minutes etc.)
- As a secondary advantage, use of your programmable heating system allows it to be used to preheat the passenger compartment.
COMFORT
Precautions in use:
The alarm volumetric movement sensor may be disturbed by the air-flow from the programmable heating while in operation.
To avoid a false alarm while using the programmable heating, it is recommended to deactivate the volumetric protection.
Always switch off the programmable heating while refuelling in order to avoid the risk of fire or explosion.
To avoid any risk of intoxication or asphyxiation, the additional heating must not be used, even for short periods, in an enclosed area such as a garage or workshop not equipped with a system for the extraction of exhaust gases.
Do not park the vehicle over inflammable materials (e.g. dry grass, dead leaves or paper) as this could present a fire risk.
The programmable heating system is supplied by the vehicle's fuel tank. Before use, ensure that the remaining fuel level is sufficient. If you are using the reserve fuel tank, we strongly advise you not to use the programmable heating system.
COMFORT
FRONT
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, seat back and head restraint which can all be adjusted for optimum driving comfort.
For your safety, do not drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and correctly adjusted.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS
- Adjustments to the height and angle of the head restraint
To raise it, pull upwards.
To lower it, press on the control A to unlock it, and simultaneously on the head restraint itself. The adjustment is correct when the top edge of the head restraint is at the same height as the top of the head. It is also tilt adjustable. To raise it, press control A to unlock it, then pull it upwards. It may be necessary to adjust the backrest angle.
- Adjustment of the backrest angle
Operate the control and adjust the position of the backrest to the front or to the rear.
-
Adjustment of the seat height Raise or lower the control the number of times required to obtain the desired position.
-
Longitudinal adjustment of seat
Lift the control bar and adjust to the desired position.
- Adjustment of lumbar support
Turn the control and adjust to the desired position.
- Heated seat controls
The heated seats only operate when the engine is running.
COMFORT
FRONT SE
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
To adjust the electrical seats, switch on the ignition or start the engine if the vehicle has gone into economy mode.
Seat adjustments are also possible for a short period after opening one of the front doors or switching off the ignition.
1. Adjustment of the seat height and angle, and longitudinal adjustment
- Raise or lower the front of the control to adjust the seat cushion angle.
Raise or lower the rear of the control to raise or lower the seat.
Simultaneously raise or lower the front and rear of the control in order to raise or lower the entire seat.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle
Move the control forwards or backwards to adjust the backrest angle.
3. Adjustment of the angle of the top of the backrest
Move the control forwards or backwards to adjust the angle of the top of the backrest.
4. Adjustment of lumbar support
This function allows you to independently adjust the height and level of lumbar support.
Move the control:
Forwards or backwards to increase or reduce the lumbar support.
Upwards or downwards to raise or lower the lumbar support zone.
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats can operate separately.
Use the corresponding adjustment dial, placed on the outer side of each front seat, to switch on and select the level of heating required:
0 : Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3 : High.
COMFORT
Head restraint height and angle adjustments on electric seats
3
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat with labeled buttons C and D, showing no text or symbols beyond labelsTo adjust the angle of the head restraint, push back or pull forward section C of the head restraint until you reach the desired position.
To raise it, pull upwards.
To lower it, press on the control D to unlock it, and simultaneously on the head restraint itself.
To remove it, press on the control D to unlock it, then pull it upwards.
Massage function The Welcome function
natural_image
Close-up of a car dashboard with a highlighted control knob and a green checkmark icon (no readable text or symbols)This function provides the driver with a back massage. It only operates when the engine is running.
Press on button A.
The warning lamp comes on and the massage function is activated for a period of 1 hour. During this time, massage is performed in cycles of 6 minutes (4 minutes of massage followed by 2 minutes break). In total, the system will perform 10 cycles.
After 1 hour, the function is deactivated. The warning lamp goes out.
Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage function at any time by pressing on button A.
The welcome function assists entry and leaving the vehicle.
After switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door, the seat moves back automatically and then stays in this position, ready for the next entry to the vehicle.
When switching on the ignition, the seat moves forward to the memorised driving position.
When moving the seat, take care that no person or object hinders the automatic movement of the seat.
This function is deactivated by default. You may activate or deactivate this function using the "Main Menu" on the instrument panel screen. To do so, select "Vehicle parameters/Comfort/Driver welcome".
COMFORT
Storing driving positions
System which takes into account the settings of the driver's seat, exterior mirrors and air conditioning. It enables you to store up to two positions using the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.
Storing a position
Using buttons M/1/2
Switch on the ignition.
Adjust your seat and your exterior mirrors.
Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds.
An audible signal is heard indicating that the storing has been taken into account.
Storing a new position cancels the previous position.
For your safety, avoid storing a driving position while driving.
Recalling a stored position
Ignition on or engine running
Briefly press button 1 or 2 to recall the corresponding position. An audible signal is heard indicating the end of the adjustment.
When the ignition is on, after a few consecutive position recalls, the function will be deactivated until the engine is started, to prevent discharging of the battery.
REAR HEAD RESTRAI
natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt with gray and black panels (no text or symbols visible)The rear head restraints can be removed and have two positions;
- high, position for use,
- low, storage position.
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower it, press the lug then the head restraint.
To remove it, place it in the high position, push the lug and pull it upwards.
To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the holes taking care to remain in the centreline of the seat back.
Never drive with the head restraints removed, they must be in place and correctly adjusted.
COMFORT
Storing driving positions
System which takes into account the settings of the driver's seat, exterior mirrors and air conditioning. It enables you to store up to two positions using the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.
Storing a position
Using buttons M/1/2
Switch on the ignition.
Adjust your seat and your exterior mirrors.
Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds.
An audible signal is heard indicating that the storing has been taken into account.
Storing a new position cancels the previous position.
For your safety, avoid storing a driving position while driving.
Recalling a stored position
Ignition on or engine running
Briefly press button 1 or 2 to recall the corresponding position. An audible signal is heard indicating the end of the adjustment.
When the ignition is on, after a few consecutive position recalls, the function will be deactivated until the engine is started, to prevent discharging of the battery.
REAR HEAD RESTRAI
natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt with gray and black panels (no text or symbols visible)The rear head restraints can be removed and have two positions;
- high, position for use,
- low, storage position.
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower it, press the lug then the head restraint.
To remove it, place it in the high position, push the lug and pull it upwards.
To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the holes taking care to remain in the centreline of the seat back.
Never drive with the head restraints removed, they must be in place and correctly adjusted.
COMFORT
REARS
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat, dashboard, and rear seats with numbered annotations (1 and 2) indicating specific components.Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) or right-hand (1/3) section of which can be folded to adapt the boot load space.
Removing the seat cushion
Move the corresponding front seat forwards if necessary.
^2 Raise the front of the seat cushion 1.
Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against the front seat.
Remove the seat cushion 1 from its fi xings by pulling upwards.
Refitting the seat cushion
Position the seat cushion 1 vertically in its fixings.
Fold down the seat cushion 1.
Press on the seat cushion to secure it.
Folding the seat
In order to fold a rear seat without any risk of damage, always start with the seat cushion, never with the seat back:
move the corresponding front seat forwards if necessary,
raise the front of the seat cushion 1,
tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against the front seat,
check that the seat belt is positioned correctly on the side of the seat back,
lower or remove the head re- straints if necessary,
pull the control 3 forwards to release the seat back 2.
F tilt the seat back 2.
The seat cushion 1 can be removed to increase the loading volume.
Returning the seat back to its original position
When returning the rear seat back to its original position:
put the seat back 2 in the upright position and secure it,
fold the seat cushion 1,
refit the head restraints or put them back in place.
When returning the rear seat back to its original position, take care not to trap the seat belts and ensure that their buckles are positioned correctly.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing the mode shift knob with a yellow circular marker labeled '3' (no text or symbols beyond the number)The red indicator on the control 3 should no longer be visible; if it is, push the seat fully back.
COMFORT
MIRRO
Exterior mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded.
Adjustment
With the ignition on:
move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror,
move control B in all four directions to adjust,
return control A to the central position.
The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.
The de-icing/demisting of the exterior mirrors is associated with that of the rear screen.
Folding
from outside; lock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.
from inside; with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using control A, they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. Control A must be pulled again.
Unfolding
from outside; unlock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.
from inside; with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.
If the position is changed manually, a long press on control A re-engag-es the mirror.
The folding and unfolding of the exterior mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer.
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which provides a view of the ground during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.
Programming
With the engine running, engage reverse gear.
Select and adjust the left-hand and right-hand mirrors in succession.
The adjustment is stored immediately.
Switching on
With the engine running, engage reverse gear.
Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.
The glass of the mirror selected tilts downwards, in accordance with its programming.
Switching off
Exit reverse gear and wait twenty seconds.
or
Return control A to the central position.
The mirror glass returns to its initial position.
The mirror glass also returns to its initial position:
- if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), - if the engine is switched off.
COMFORT
Interior mirror
natural_image
Close-up of a car rearview mirror with a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.
Manual model
The mirror is fitted with a night-time anti-dazzle device.
Adjustment
Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day/night position
Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the normal "day" position.
As a safety precaution, the mirrors must be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".
Electrochromatic exterior/interior mirrors
System which automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses.
In order to prevent dazzle, the glass of the interior and exterior mirrors darkens automatically in relation to the intensity of the light from the rear.
It lightens when the light (light beam of following vehicles, sun...) decreases, so guaranteeing optimum visibility.
Switching on
Switch on the ignition and press switch 1.
The indicator light 2 comes on and the mirror operates automatically.
Switching off
Press switch 1.
The indicator light 2 switches off and the mirror remains in its lightest state.
In order to guarantee optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the glass of the interior and exterior mirrors lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
COMFORT
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
The height and depth of the steering wheel can be adjusted to adapt the driving position to the size of the driver.
As a safety precaution, it is imperative that these operations are carried out while the vehicle is stationary.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)Adjustment
First, adjust the driver's seat to the most suitable position.
When stationary, pull the control A to unlock the steering wheel.
Adjust the height and depth.
Push the control to lock the steering wheel.
After locking, if you press firmly on the steering wheel, a slight click may be heard.
ACCESS
REMOTE CONTR
System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle and provide guide-me-home lighting, as well as providing protection against theft.
Unlocking the vehicle
Unfolding the key
First press button A to unfold the key.
Complete unlocking using the remote control
Press the open padlock to unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using the key
Turn the key to the left in the driver's door lock to unlock the vehicle.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds and lighting of the courtesy light (if the function is activated).
According to version, the exterior mirrors unfold at the same time.
Selective unlocking using the remote control
Press the open padlock once to unlock the driver's door only.
Press the open padlock again to unlock the other doors and the boot.
Each unlocking is confirmed by rapid fl ashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds and by switching on of the courtesy light.
According to version, the exterior mirrors unfold at the same time as the first unlocking action.
The complete or selective unlocking parameter is set via the instrument panel display configuration menu (see "Instruments and controls" section).
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
Selective unlocking is not possible using the key.
Electric boot opening
Press button B to open the boot.
ACCESS
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking using the remote control
Press the closed pad-lock to lock the vehicle completely.
Press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows and sunroof automatically in addition to locking.
Normal locking using the key
Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely.
Locking is confirmed by fixed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds and by switching off of the courtesy light.
According to version, the exterior mirrors fold at the same time.
If one of the doors, the rear screen or the boot is still open, the central locking does not take place.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will relock automatically after thirty seconds unless a door is opened.
When stationary with the engine off, locking is confirmed by flashing of the interior locking control indicator light.
The folding and unfolding of the exterior mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer.
Deadlocking using the remote control
Press the closed pad-lock to lock the vehicle completely or press the closed padlock for more than two seconds to close the windows and sunroof automatically in addition to locking.
Press the closed padlock again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking using the key
Turn the key to the right in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely and hold it in this position for more than two seconds to close the windows automatically in addition to locking.
Turn the key to the right again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds.
According to version, the exterior mirrors fold at the same time.
Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the manual central control button.
When stationary with the engine off, locking is confirmed by flashing of the indicator lamp on the interior locking control.
If one of the doors or the boot is open or has not been closed correctly, the central locking will not work.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is dead-locked.
ACCESS
Folding the key
natural_image
Illustration of a car key with a switch and a circular button labeled 'A', showing a yellow curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)First press button A to fold the key.
Locating your vehicle
Press the closed padlock to locate your locked vehicle in a car park.
This is indicated by switching on of the interior lighting and flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds.
The vehicle remains locked.
Guide-me-home lighting Anti-theft protection
A press on button B operates the guide-me-home lighting (lighting of the sidelamps, dipped beams and number plate lamps).
A second press before the end of the timing cancels the guide-me-home lighting.
The timed duration can be set via the "Lighting" menu on the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.
In the event of a malfunction, you are informed by lighting of this warning light, an
audible signal and a message on the multifunction display.
In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
ACCESS
IGNITION SI
1. "S": Steering lock
To unlock the steering, gently move the steering wheel while turning the key, without forcing it.
2. "M": Drive position
Depending on the version of your vehicle, the orange and red warning lamps should also come on for a short time.
3. "D": Starter
Release the key as soon the engine has started.
If the first attempt fails, switch off the ignition. Wait ten seconds then operate the starter again.
Steering lock
-
"S": After removing the key, turn the steering wheel to lock the steering. The key can only be removed in position S
-
"M": Ignition switched on, the steering is unlocked (by turning the key to position M, move the steering wheel gently if necessary).
-
"D": Starter position. Never turn the key to this position when the engine is running.
Key in ignition buzzer
If you forget to remove the key from the ignition, a buzzer sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed space or where there is insufficient ventilation.
It is essential always to drive with the engine running in order to retain braking and steering assistance.
Never remove the ignition key before the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Avoid attaching a heavy object to the key which would weigh down on its shaft in the switch and could cause a malfunction.
STOPPING
e Vehicles equipped with a S. turbocharger
Never stop the engine without having allowed it to run for a few seconds at idle, this being the time required for the turbocharger to return to a normal speed.
Do not flick the accelerator at the moment of switching off the ignition. This could cause serious damage to the turbocharger(s).
ACCESS
Malfunction
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
Reinitialisation
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition).
Press the closed padlock immediately for a few seconds, until the operation requested is triggered.
Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
Changing the battery
natural_image
Close-up of a key inserted into an open lock, showing internal components and a magnified view of the lock (no text or symbols visible)Battery ref.: CR0523/3 volts.
This replacement battery is available from CITROËN dealers.
If the battery is flat, you are informed by lighting of this warning light, an audible signal
and a message on the multifunction display.
Unclip the casing using a coin at the notch.
Slide the flat battery out of its location.
Slide the new battery into its location observing the original direction.
Clip the casing.
Reinitialise the remote control.
ACCESS
Lost keys
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's V5 registration certifi cate and you personal identifi cation documents.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a replacement key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle.
You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reprogrammed.
The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reprogramming.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system, this could cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.
Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection point.
ACCESS
Folding the key
natural_image
Illustration of a car key with a switch and a circular button labeled 'A', showing a yellow curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)First press button A to fold the key.
Locating your vehicle
Press the closed padlock to locate your locked vehicle in a car park.
This is indicated by switching on of the interior lighting and flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds.
The vehicle remains locked.
Guide-me-home lighting Anti-theft protection
A press on button B operates the guide-me-home lighting (lighting of the sidelamps, dipped beams and number plate lamps).
A second press before the end of the timing cancels the guide-me-home lighting.
The timed duration can be set via the "Lighting" menu on the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.
In the event of a malfunction, you are informed by lighting of this warning light, an
audible signal and a message on the multifunction display.
In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
ACCESS
Lost keys
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's V5 registration certifi cate and you personal identifi cation documents.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a replacement key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle.
You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reprogrammed.
The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reprogramming.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system, this could cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.
Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection point.
ACCESS
IGNITION SI
1. "S": Steering lock
To unlock the steering, gently move the steering wheel while turning the key, without forcing it.
2. "M": Drive position
Depending on the version of your vehicle, the orange and red warning lamps should also come on for a short time.
3. "D": Starter
Release the key as soon the engine has started.
If the first attempt fails, switch off the ignition. Wait ten seconds then operate the starter again.
Steering lock
-
"S": After removing the key, turn the steering wheel to lock the steering. The key can only be removed in position S
-
"M": Ignition switched on, the steering is unlocked (by turning the key to position M, move the steering wheel gently if necessary).
-
"D": Starter position. Never turn the key to this position when the engine is running.
Key in ignition buzzer
If you forget to remove the key from the ignition, a buzzer sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed space or where there is insufficient ventilation.
It is essential always to drive with the engine running in order to retain braking and steering assistance.
Never remove the ignition key before the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Avoid attaching a heavy object to the key which would weigh down on its shaft in the switch and could cause a malfunction.
STOPPING
e Vehicles equipped with a s. turbocharger
Never stop the engine without having allowed it to run for a few seconds at idle, this being the time required for the turbocharger to return to a normal speed.
Do not flick the accelerator at the moment of switching off the ignition. This could cause serious damage to the turbocharger(s).
ACCESS
ALAI
System which protects and provides a deterrent against the theft of your vehicle. It provides two types of protection, exterior and interior, as well as an anti-tamper function.
Exterior protection
The system monitors any opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to enter the vehicle by forcing a door, the boot or the bonnet.
Interior protection
The system monitors any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window or moves inside the vehicle.
If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle or a window partially open, deactivate the interior protection.
Anti-tamper function
The system monitors any putting out of service of its components.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to put the wires of the siren, the central control or the battery out of service.
Do not make any modifications to the alarm system, this could cause malfunctions.
Locking the vehicle with full alarm
Activation
Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the locking button on the remote control.
The alarm is activated; the indicator light on button A flashes once per second.
Deactivation
Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the remote control.
The alarm is deactivated; the indicator light on button A switches off.
Locking the vehicle with exterior protection alarm only
Deactivation of the interior protection
Switch off the ignition.
Within ten seconds, press button A until the indicator light is lit continuously.
F Get out of the vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the locking button on the remote control.
The exterior protection alarm alone remains activated; the indicator light on button A flashes once per second.
In order to be taken into account, this deactivation must be carried out each time the ignition is switched off.
Reactivation of the interior protection
Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the remote control.
Relock the vehicle using the remote control.
The alarm is activated again with both types of protection; the indicator light on button A switches off.
ACCESS
Triggering
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and flashing of the direction indicators for approximately thirty seconds.
After it has been triggered, the alarm is again operational.
If the alarm is triggered ten times in succession, the eleventh time will result in it becoming inactive.
If the indicator light on button A fl ashes rapidly, this indicates that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this fl ashing stops immediately.
To avoid triggering the alarm when washing your vehicle, lock it using the key.
Do not activate the alarm before disconnecting the battery, otherwise the siren will sound.
Failure of the remote control
Unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.
Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops.
Locking the vehicle without alarm
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.
Malfunction
When the ignition is switched on, lighting of the indicator light on button A for ten seconds indicates a siren fault.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Automatic operation \*
Depending on the legislation in force in your country, one of these cases may occur:
- 45 seconds after the vehicle is locked using the remote control, the alarm is activated, regardless of the status of the doors and boot.
- 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed, the alarm is activated.
To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the remote control.
* According to country.
ACCESS
ELECTRIC WII
System used to open or close a window manually or automatically. Fitted with a safety auto-reverse system and a system for deactivation in the event of misuse of the rear controls.
4
- Driver's electric window control.
- Passenger's electric window control.
- Rear right electric window control.
- Rear left electric window control.
- Deactivation of the rear electric window and door controls.
One-touch electric windows
There are two options:
- manual mode
Press or pull the control gently. The window stops when the control is released.
- automatic mode
Press or pull the control firmly. The window opens or closes fully when the control is released.
Pressing the control again stops the movement of the window.
The electric window controls remain operational for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off or until the vehicle is locked after a door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows cannot be operated from the driver's door control pad, carry out the operation from the control pad of the passenger door concerned, and vice versa.
Safety auto-reverse
When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and partially lowers again.
If the window cannot be closed (for example, in the presence of ice), immediately after the movement is reversed:
press and hold the control until the window opens fully,
then pull the control immediately and hold it until the window closes,
continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed.
The safety auto-reverse function is not operational during these operations.
ACCESS
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically, its operation must be reinitialised:
pull the control until the window stops,
release the control and pull it again until the window closes fully,
continue to hold the control for approximately one second after the window has closed,
press the control to lower the window automatically to the low position,
when the window has reached the low position, press the control again for approximately one second.
The safety auto-reverse function is not operational during these operations.
Deactivation of the rear electric window and door controls
For the safety of your children, press control 5 to deactivate the rear electric window controls regardless of their position.
Indicator light on, the rear controls are deactivated.
Indicator light off, the rear controls are activated.
A message on the instrument panel display informs you of the activation/deactivation of the control.
This control also deactivates the interior controls for the rear doors (refer to the section "Child safety - § Electric child lock").
Any other status of the indicator light indicates a malfunction of the electric child lock. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during operation of the electric windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the control concerned.
When the driver operates the controls for the passengers' electric windows, he must ensure that no one is preventing correct closing of the windows.
The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.
Be aware of children when operating the windows.
ACCESS
DC
Opening
From outside
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)After unlocking the vehicle completely using the remote control or the key, pull the door handle.
When the selective unlocking is activated, the first press of the remote control unlocking button permits unlocking of the driver's door only.
From inside
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)Pull the front door control to open the door; this unlocks this vehicle completely.
Pull the rear door control to open the door; this unlocks the door concerned only.
With the selective unlocking activated:
- the driver's door control unlocks the driver's door only.
- the other door controls unlock the other doors and the boot.
The interior door controls do not operate when the vehicle is dead-locked.
Manual centralised control
System which provides full manual locking or unlocking of the doors and boot from the inside.
Locking
Press button A to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator light on the button comes on. It fl ashes when the doors are locked while stationary with the engine off.
If one of the doors is open, the central locking from the inside does not take place.
ACCESS
Unlocking
Press button A again to unlock the vehicle.
The red indicator light on the button switches off.
If the vehicle is locked or dead-locked from the outside, the red indicator light fl ashes and button A is inactive.
In this case, use the remote control or the key to unlock the vehicle.
Automatic centralised control
System which provides full automatic locking or unlocking of the doors and the boot while driving.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
Locking
When the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the doors and the boot lock automatically.
If one of the doors is open, the automatic central locking does not take place.
If the boot is open, the automatic central locking of the doors is active.
Unlocking
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press button A to unlock the doors and the boot temporarily.
Activation
Press button A for more than two seconds.
A confirmation message appears on the instrument panel display, accompanied by an audible signal.
Deactivation
Press button A again for more than two seconds.
A confirmation message appears on the instrument panel display, accompanied by an audible signal.
Emergency control
System which locks or unlocks the doors mechanically in the event of a malfunction of the battery or of the central locking.
Locking the driver's door
Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the right.
Unlocking the driver's door
Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to the left.
Locking the front and rear passenger doors
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow arrow pointing to a small hole (no text or symbols visible)Insert the key in the lock, located on the edge of the door, then turn it one eighth of a turn.
Unlocking the front and rear passenger doors
Pull the interior door opening control.
ACCESS
BOOT (SALOC)
Opening
natural_image
Rear view of a white car with a yellow license plate and red side stripes (no visible text or symbols)Press upwards on lever 1 and lift up the boot.
Locking/unlocking Tailgate release
With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out using:
- The remote control.
- The key in a door lock.
- The interior central locking/unlocking control.
The boot automatically locks when the vehicle is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if automatic central locking is deactivated. It is unlocked when a door is opened or when the central locking button is pressed (speed lower than 6 mph (10 km/h)).
System for mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a battery or central locking malfunction.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's frontview component with a yellow arrow pointing to a labeled section (no text or symbols beyond label)Unlocking
Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.
Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
Push the white part, located inside the lock, to the left to unlock the boot.
ACCESS
BOOT (TOURI
Manual opening
natural_image
Top-down view of a car's rear bumper with a yellow 'A' marking on the front panel (no text or symbols beyond the label)Press upwards on lever A and lift up the tailgate.
Electric opening
Press upwards on lever A, or press button B of the remote control.
Do not attempt to help the opening of the tailgate manually after pressing the control A.
Manual closing
Lower the tailgate using the interior handle C.
Electric closing
Press the push-button D to close the tailgate.
Do not interrupt the closing of the boot; if any obstacle prevents it closing, the operation will stop and the tailgate will automatically rise by a few centimetres.
Locking/unlocking
With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out using:
The remote control.
- The key in a door lock.
- The interior central locking/unlocking control.
The boot automatically locks when the vehicle is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if automatic central locking is deactivated. It is unlocked when a door is opened or when the central locking button is pressed (at a speed of less than 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Interrupting the opening/closing of the boot
When the tailgate is being opened or closed electrically, you can interrupt its movement at any point by pressing push-button D, the control A or button B.
You can then open or close the tail-gate electrically or manually, if necessary moving it in the opposite direction to release it.
Memorisation of an intermediate position
You can store an opening angle for the tailgate:
Manually or automatically move the tailgate to the required position.
Make a long press on push-button D. The system emits a short audible beep.
Release the push-button D.
ACCESS
Cancelling the memorisation
With the tailgate in the intermediate position, you can cancel the stored position:
Make a long press on push-button D. The system emits a long audible beep.
Release the push-button D. The tailgate will return to the fully open position at the next use.
Electrical protection of the motor
If the tailgate is repeatedly opened and closed in quick succession, the motor can start to overheat and then cut out, preventing opening and closing of the tailgate.
Allow the motor to cool down for ten minutes without opening or closing the tailgate.
Closing in manual back-up mode remains possible.
To avoid risk of injury, make sure that no one is in the vicinity of the boot while opening and closing.
If the tailgate is carrying extra weight (snow, bicycle carrier, etc.) there is a risk of it closing under this load. Support the tailgate or fi rst unload the bicycle carrier or clear the snow.
When using an automatic car wash, don't forget to lock the vehicle so as to avoid any risk of motorised opening of the tailgate.
ACCESS
PANORAMIC SUN (SALOON)
This sun roof provides optimum light and visibility in the passenger compartment.
Operation
natural_image
Close-up of a white electronic device with two labeled buttons (A and B) and a transparent display case (no readable text or symbols)Sun roof closed
- Press B to first notch: tilting.
- Press B to second notch: automatic complete tilting.
- Press A to first notch: sliding towards rear.
- Press A to second notch: automatic total sliding towards rear.
Sun roof open
- Press B to first notch: closure.
- Press B to second notch: automatic total closure.
Tilted sun roof
- Press A to first notch: closure.
- Press A to second notch: automatic total closure.
natural_image
Close-up of a smartphone with a yellow arrow pointing to its screen (no visible text or symbols)Your sun roof is fitted with a manually-operated blind.
Anti-pinch
An anti-pinch device stops the sun roof from closing, whether sliding or tilting. If it meets an obstacle, it re-opens.
Reinitialisation
After a battery disconnection or if there has been a malfunction, you have to re-initialise the anti-pinch function.
move control B until the roof is in the complete tilting position,
keep control B pressed down for a minimum of 1 second.
During these operations, the anti-pinch function does not operate.
Always remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle, even if for a short time.
In the event of anything being caught by the sun roof closing, you must reverse the roof movement.
To do that, reverse the position of the control concerned.
When the driver is operating the sun roof, he or she must always make sure that the passengers are not preventing it from closing properly.
The driver must ensure that passengers use the sun roof control correctly.
Pay special attention to where children are when operating the sun roof.
The fi tting of a sun roof as an accessory is prohibited.
ACCESS
GLASS PANORAMIC
(TOURER)
This device comprises a tinted glass panoramic surface 1 to improve brightness and vision in the passenger compartment.
It is fitted with an electrical blind 2 to help maintain a comfortable temperature and reduce noise.
SEQUENTIAL ELECTRICAL BLIND
natural_image
Close-up of a white electronic device with two labeled buttons (A and B) and two internal components, no readable text or symbols.Opening
Press control A.
Pressing to the 1st notch allows you to open the blind step by step.
Pressing to the 2nd notch allows you to fully open the blind.
The blind stops in the closest pre-defined position (11 positions) as soon as you release the control.
Closing
Press control B.
Press to the first notch to close the blind step by step.
Press to the second notch to close the blind completely.
The blind stops at the nearest pre-set position (11 positions) as soon as you release the control.
Anti-pinch
If the blind meets an obstacle whilst closing, it stops and opens partially again.
You must re-initialise the anti-pinch function within 5 seconds of the blind stopping:
press control B until the blind is fully closed (closing in steps of a few centimetres).
After a battery disconnection, or if there has been a malfunction, you have to re-initialise the anti-pinch function:
^cF press control B to the 2^nd notch (fully closed),
- wait until the blind is fully closed,
press control B for at least 3 seconds. If the blind opens randomly during a closing operation, and straight after the blind stops:
^cB Press control B until the blind closes fully.
During these operations, the anti-pinch function does not operate.
In the event of anything being caught when the blind is moving, you must reverse the movement of the blind. To do so, reverse the position of the control.
When the driver is operating the blind, he or she must always make sure that the passengers are not preventing it from closing properly.
The driver must ensure that his passengers are using the blind correctly.
Pay special attention to children when operating the blind.
ACCESS
F
Capacity of the tank: approximately 71 litres.
Low fuel level
When the minimum level in the tank is reached, this warning light comes on on the instrument
panel, accompanied by an audible warning and a message on the multifunction display.
You have enough fuel left to drive approximately 30 miles (approx. 50 km).
Opening the fuel flap
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel with yellow directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)Press at the top left corner, then pull open from the left.
Refuelling
natural_image
Close-up of a car charging plug with a yellow 'A' label, no visible text or symbolsturn the key a quarter turn to lock and unlock the filler cap,
when refuelling, place the cap on hook A,
fill the tank, but do not persist after the third cut-off; this could cause your vehicle to malfunction. While you are refuelling, the engine must be stopped and the ignition switched off.
For a petrol engine with a catalytic converter, unleaded fuel is compulsory.
The filler neck is narrower to ensure that only unleaded petrol can be put in.
ACCESS
Fuel quality
A label inside the fi ller fl ap tells you which type of fuel to use.
The petrol engines are designed to run on RON 95.
However, for better performance (petrol engine), we recommend RON 98.
If you should put in fuel that is not suitable for your vehicle's engine type, it is imperative to have the tank drained before you start the engine again.
BioFlex engine
A Biofl ex vehicle is one that has been designed to operate equally on unleaded petrol (95 or 98 RON) or on bioethanol (in Europe this is a mixture of 85 % ethanol and 15 % unleaded petrol, known as E85).
As a result, no matter how much fuel remains in the tank, and whatever this fuel may be (unleaded petrol, E85 or a mixture of the two) you can refuel at any time with unleaded petrol (95 or 98 RON) or with bioethanol (E85).
There is no problem in running this vehicle on only unleaded petrol.
In winter conditions, starting from cold may sometimes seem diffi cult. During periods of very cold weather we recommend the use of 95 or 98 unleaded petrol in preference to E85 so as to ensure optimum starting performance.
VISIBILITY
LIGHTING CONT
System for selection and control of the various front and rear lights providing the vehicle's lighting.
Main lighting
The various front and rear lights of the vehicle are designed to adapt the driver's visibility progressively in relation to the climatic conditions:
- side lights, to be seen,
- dipped headlamps to see without dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when the road is clear,
- directional headlamps for improved visibility when cornering.
Additional lighting
Other lights are installed to fulfil the requirements of particular driving conditions:
- a rear fog lamp to be seen from a distance,
- front fog lamps for even better visibility,
- daytime lights to be seen during the day.
Programming
Various automatic lighting control modes are also available according to the following options:
- guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic lighting,
- directional lighting.
Manual controls
The lighting commands are issued directly by the driver by means of the ring A and the lever B.
A. main lighting mode selection ring, with:
lights off,
automatic switching on of the lights,
side lights only,
dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.
B. lever for inversion of the lights by pulling: dipped headlamps/main beam headlamps.
In the lights off and side lights modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps directly ("headlamp fl ash") for as long as he pulls the lever.
Displays
Lighting of the corresponding indicator light on the instrument panel confirms the selective switching on of the lighting selected.
VISIBILITY
C. fog lamps selection ring.
The fog lamps operate with the side lights and the dipped and main beam headlamps.
Model with rear foglamps only
- 1 st turn forwards: lighting of rear foglamps.
- 1 st turn rearwards: extinction of rear foglamps.
Model with front and rear foglamps
- 1 st turn forwards: lighting of front foglamps.
- 2 nd turn forwards: lighting of rear foglamps.
- 1 st turn rearwards: extinction of rear foglamps.
- 2 nd turn rearwards: extinction of front foglamps.
In good or rainy weather, both day and night, the front fog lamps and the rear fog lamps are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or snow.
In these weather conditions, it is your responsibility to switch on the fog lamps and dipped headlamps manually as the brightness sensor may detect sufficient light.
Do not forget to switch off the front fog lamps and the rear fog lamps when they are no longer necessary.
Lights on buzzer
The triggering of an audible signal when a front door is opened warns the driver that he has forgotten to switch off his vehicle's lights, with the ignition off and in manual lights mode.
In this case, switching off the lights stops the audible signal.
With the ignition off, if the dipped headlamps remain on, they will switch off automatically after thirty minutes to prevent discharging of the battery.
VISIBILITY
Daytime-running lamps
System which switches on special lights at the front, to make the vehicle more visible by day.
They light up automatically and permanently, when the engine is running, if:
- The function is activated * in the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.
- The lighting control is at position 0 or AUTO.
- All the headlamps are off.
You can deactivate * this function using the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.
Manual guide-me-home lighting
The temporary maintaining of the dipped headlamps lighting after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps using the lever B.
A second "headlamp flash" switches the function off again.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.
Automatic lighting
The side lights and dipped head-lamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, when a low level of external light is detected or in certain cases of activation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the wind-screen wipers are switched off, the lights are switched off automatically.
Activation
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position. The automatic lighting is accompanied by a message on the multifunction display.
Deactivation
Turn ring A to a position other than "AUTO". Deactivation is accompanied by a message on the multifunction display.
VISIBILITY
Daytime-running lamps
System which switches on special lights at the front, to make the vehicle more visible by day.
They light up automatically and permanently, when the engine is running, if:
- The function is activated * in the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.
- The lighting control is at position 0 or AUTO.
- All the headlamps are off.
You can deactivate * this function using the "Main Menu" of the instrument panel screen.
Manual guide-me-home lighting
The temporary maintaining of the dipped headlamps lighting after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps using the lever B.
A second "headlamp flash" switches the function off again.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.
Automatic lighting
The side lights and dipped head-lamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, when a low level of external light is detected or in certain cases of activation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the wind-screen wipers are switched off, the lights are switched off automatically.
Activation
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position. The automatic lighting is accompanied by a message on the multifunction display.
Deactivation
Turn ring A to a position other than "AUTO". Deactivation is accompanied by a message on the multifunction display.
VISIBILITY
Linked with the automatic "Guide-me-home" lighting
Link with the automatic lighting provides the "guide-me-home" lighting with the following additional options:
- selection of the duration of maintaining of the lighting for 15, 30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle parameters on the multifunction display configuration menu,
- automatic activation of "guide-me-home" lighting when automatic lighting is in operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the brightness sensor, the lights come on and a message appears on the multifunction display, accompanied by an audible signal.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
In fog or snow, the brightness sensor may detect sufficient light. Therefore, the lights will not come on automatically.
Do not cover the brightness sensor, linked with the rain sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the interior mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT THE HEADLAMPS
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side control panel with a digital display showing 3/2/1 and '和' (no text or symbols on the main component)To avoid dazzling other road users, the height of the halogen bulb head-lamps must be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.
- 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people. - 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting. - 5 people + maximum authorised loads.
- Intermediate setting.
- Driver + maximum authorised loads.
Initial setting is position "0".
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTI OF THE DIRECTIONAL HEADLAMPS
natural_image
Close-up of a silver car's front grille and headlights (no visible text or symbols)In order to avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, this system corrects the height of the xenon head-lamps beam automatically and when stationary, in relation to the load in the vehicle.
If a malfunction occurs, this warning light is displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction display.
The system then places your head-lamps in the lowest position.
Do not touch the xenon headlamps. Consult a CITROËN dealer.
VISIBILITY
DIRECTIONAL LIGHTI
"Bend lighting" function
With dipped or main beams, this function provides additional lighting for the inside of a bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (approx 40 km/h).
This lighting is most useful when travelling at low and medium speed (urban driving, winding road, intersections, parking manoeuvres...).
natural_image
Top-down view of a car spraying water on a road with green vegetation and a circular area (no text or symbols visible)without bend lighting
Deactivation
This function is deactivated:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel,
- when stationary or at very low speed,
- when reverse gear is engaged,
- when the directional headlamps are switched off.
Activation
This function is activated:
- when the direction indicator is activated,
- from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel.
natural_image
Top-down illustration of a car spraying water onto a road with greenery and a small building nearby (no text or symbols)with bend lighting
VISIBILITY
Directional headlamps function
When the dipped or main beam headlamps are on, this function, associated with the "bend lighting" function, enables the light beam to follow the direction of the road.
The use of this function, linked with the xenon headlamps only, considerably improves the quality of your lighting when cornering.
natural_image
Top-down illustration of a car driving on a winding road with green grass and a small vehicle nearby (no text or symbols)without directional lighting
Programming
The function is activated or deactivated via the instrument panel display "Main Menu".
To do this, select "Vehicle parameters\Lighting\Directional headlamps".
natural_image
Top-down illustration of a car driving on a winding road with a cyclist nearby (no text or symbols)with directional lighting
Operating fault
If a malfunction occurs, this warning light fl ashes on the instrument panel, accompanied by a message on the multifunction display.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
When stationary or moving at very low speed or when reverse gear is engaged, the function is inactive.
The status of the function remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.
VISIBILITY
WIPER CONTR
System for selection and control of the various front and rear wiping modes for the elimination of rain and cleaning.
The vehicle's various front and rear wipers are designed to improve the driver's visibility progressively in relation to the climatic conditions.
Programming
Various automatic wiper control modes are also available according to the following options:
- automatic wiping for the wind-screen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
Manual controls
The wiper commands are issued directly by the driver by means of the lever A and the ring B.
Windscreen wipers
A. wiping speed selection lever:
2 fast (heavy rain),
1 normal (moderate rain),
I intermittent (proportional to the speed of the vehicle),
0 park,
single wipe (press downwards), or
AUTO ↓ automatic, then single wipe (see following page).
Rear wiper (Tourer)
B. rear wiper selection ring:
park,
intermittent wipe,
wash-wipe (set duration).
If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a tailgate bicycle carrier, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the instrument panel display configuration menu.
VISIBILITY
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.
Programming
The function is activated or deactivated via the instrument panel display configuration menu.
This function is activated by default.
Windscreen and headlamp wash
Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash then the windscreen wipers operate for a fixed period.
If the dipped headlamps are on, the headlamp washers operate at the same time.
Automatic windscreen wiping
The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the interior mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.
natural_image
Diagram of a car with two yellow curved arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver by pushing lever A to the "AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message on the instrument panel display.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver by moving lever A upwards and returning it to position "0".
It is accompanied by a message on the instrument panel display.
The automatic wiping must be reactivated if the ignition has been off for more than one minute, by pushing lever A downwards.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the brightness sensor and located in the centre of the wind-screen behind the interior mirror.
Switch off the automatic wiping when using an automatic car wash. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic wiping.
VISIBILITY
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.
Programming
The function is activated or deactivated via the instrument panel display configuration menu.
This function is activated by default.
Windscreen and headlamp wash
Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash then the windscreen wipers operate for a fixed period.
If the dipped headlamps are on, the headlamp washers operate at the same time.
Automatic windscreen wiping
The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the interior mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.
natural_image
Diagram of a car with two yellow curved arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver by pushing lever A to the "AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message on the instrument panel display.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver by moving lever A upwards and returning it to position "0".
It is accompanied by a message on the instrument panel display.
The automatic wiping must be reactivated if the ignition has been off for more than one minute, by pushing lever A downwards.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the brightness sensor and located in the centre of the wind-screen behind the interior mirror.
Switch off the automatic wiping when using an automatic car wash. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic wiping.
VISIBILITY
Special position of the windscreen wipers
natural_image
Illustration of a car with two yellow directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)In the minute following switching off of the ignition, any action on the stalk positions the wipers in the centre of the windscreen.
This action enables you to position the wiper blades for winter parking, cleaning or replacement.
To park the wipers after this has been done, switch on the ignition and operate the stalk.
For optimum and lasting wiping of the "fl at-blade" wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy water,
- change them approximately every 6 months,
- avoid using them to retain cardboard on the windscreen.
COURTESY L
Selection and control of the various passenger compartment lights.
Front courtesy light
- Front courtesy light
- Map reading lights
Rear courtesy light
- Rear courtesy light
- Map reading lights
In this position, the courtesy light comes on gradually:
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door is opened,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
VISIBILITY
Special position of the windscreen wipers
natural_image
Illustration of a car with two yellow directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)In the minute following switching off of the ignition, any action on the stalk positions the wipers in the centre of the windscreen.
This action enables you to position the wiper blades for winter parking, cleaning or replacement.
To park the wipers after this has been done, switch on the ignition and operate the stalk.
For optimum and lasting wiping of the "fl at-blade" wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy water,
- change them approximately every 6 months,
- avoid using them to retain cardboard on the windscreen.
COURTESY L
Selection and control of the various passenger compartment lights.
Front courtesy light
- Front courtesy light
- Map reading lights
Rear courtesy light
- Rear courtesy light
- Map reading lights
In this position, the courtesy light comes on gradually:
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door is opened,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
VISIBILITY
In permanent lighting mode, different lighting times are available:
- with the ignition off, approximately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
Map reading lights
With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.
Panoramic glass roof rear reading lights (Tourer)
With the key in position or with the ignition on:
Press the corresponding switch. The reading light concerned comes on for ten minutes.
The rear reading lights come on:
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when the vehicle is unlocked.
They switch off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on.
VISIBILITY
AMBIENT LIGH
Your vehicle is equipped with warm and welcoming ambient lighting. A soft orange light is emitted.
Dashboard
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and control buttons (no text or symbols visible)Operation
When starting the engine, with the vehicle lights on, lights located along the dashboard are activated.
natural_image
Close-up of a device panel with buttons and a central display, showing yellow arrows pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)
Central console
The lights are located on the roof console, near the front interior lamp. They light up the central console.
Operation
These lights are activated with the automatic switching on of the lights, when the exterior light is poor. They are deactivated when the instrument panel goes out.
The intensity of the lighting varies along with that of the instrument panel.
Press buttons A to increase or reduce the intensity of the lighting.
DOOR LIGHTING
Door opening controls lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)They are located on the front and rear interior door opening controls. The rear door opening controls lighting is deactivated if child safety is activated.
VISIBILITY
AMBIENT LIGH
Your vehicle is equipped with warm and welcoming ambient lighting. A soft orange light is emitted.
Dashboard
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and control buttons (no text or symbols visible)Operation
When starting the engine, with the vehicle lights on, lights located along the dashboard are activated.
natural_image
Close-up of a device panel with buttons and a central display, showing yellow arrows pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)
Central console
The lights are located on the roof console, near the front interior lamp. They light up the central console.
Operation
These lights are activated with the automatic switching on of the lights, when the exterior light is poor. They are deactivated when the instrument panel goes out.
The intensity of the lighting varies along with that of the instrument panel.
Press buttons A to increase or reduce the intensity of the lighting.
DOOR LIGHTING
Door opening controls lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)They are located on the front and rear interior door opening controls. The rear door opening controls lighting is deactivated if child safety is activated.
VISIBILITY
Front door storage pockets automatic lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)A white light is emitted to light up the door storage pockets.
Operation
The lighting comes on automatically when you place your hand inside the storage pocket. It goes out a few seconds after you remove your hand.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The welcome lighting is made up of:
- The interior (roof) lamps.
- The floor lighting
- The pavement lighting when a door is open.
Floor lighting
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with yellow arrows pointing to key compartments (no visible text or symbols)In the front and the rear of the vehicle, when a door is opened, this lights up the interior of the vehicle.
Pavement lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel showing the door and wheel, with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)With the door open, this lights up the ground next to the vehicle.
VISIBILITY
Front door storage pockets automatic lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)A white light is emitted to light up the door storage pockets.
Operation
The lighting comes on automatically when you place your hand inside the storage pocket. It goes out a few seconds after you remove your hand.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The welcome lighting is made up of:
- The interior (roof) lamps.
- The floor lighting
- The pavement lighting when a door is open.
Floor lighting
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with yellow arrows pointing to key compartments (no visible text or symbols)In the front and the rear of the vehicle, when a door is opened, this lights up the interior of the vehicle.
Pavement lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel showing the door and wheel, with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)With the door open, this lights up the ground next to the vehicle.
LAYOUT
SUN VISOR
System which protects against sun from ahead or from the side and courtesy system with illuminated mirror.
natural_image
Close-up of a white car interior with a yellow directional arrow on the door (no text or symbols visible)With the ignition on, lift the flap; the mirror is illuminated automatically.
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold the visor downwards.
It can be disengaged from its central fixing and pivoted over to the side windows if required.
AIR CONDITIONED GLOVEBOX
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled buttons and control panel (no readable text or symbols)To open the glovebox, pull on the handle and lower the lid.
The glovebox has a manually closable air conditioning vent B.
It has 2 or 3 sockets C to connect audio/video equipment.
It has automatic lighting.
SKI FLAP
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat assembly with silver leather seats and a black seat cover (no visible text or symbols)A flap in the backrest, located to the rear of the armrest, facilitates the carrying of long objects.
To open
Lower the rear armrest.
Pull the fl ap handle down.
Lower the flap.
Load the objects from inside the boot.
Whilst driving, the glove-box should be kept closed.
Ensure that the objects are well secured and that they do not impede the operation of the gear lever.
LAYOUT
MATS
natural_image
Close-up of a car's backrest panel with visible mounting holes and side brackets (no text or symbols)Equipment available for the driver and front passenger.
Removing
Slide the seat back as far as possible,
unclip the fi xings,
remove the fi xings, then the mat.
Refi tting
Position the mat correctly,
clip the fi xings,
check that the mat is held is place correctly.
To avoid your feet becoming jammed under the pedals:
- only use mats which are suitable for the fixings already present in the vehicle. The use of these fixings is essential,
- never stack up more than 1 mat.
The use of a mat not approved by CITROËN may obstruct access to the pedals and hinder the cruise control/speed limiter function.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN are fitted with a 3rd fi xing located in the pedal area to avoid any risk of interference with the pedals.
FRONT ARMREST
natural_image
Close-up of a car headrest lever with a yellow circular indicator labeled 'A' (no text or symbols on the lever itself)Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.
Adjustment
To optimise your driving position:
lift the control A,
push the armrest forwards.
The armrest returns to its initial position when you push it rearwards.
Cup-holder
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a black plastic seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)F Lift the armrest to access the cup holder.
LAYOUT
Driver's oddments tray
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols√ Pull the handle towards you.
Cup-holder
The rear cup-holder A is located in the rear central armrest.
Lower the rear armrest.
^cF Pull forwards to extract the cup-holder.
Storage
Lift up the upper part of the rear central armrest to access storage space B.
SIDE BLIN
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the back panel with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)Pull on the tab A and position the blind on the hook B.
REAR ARMREST
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with labeled components A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)Comfort and storage system for the rear passengers.
12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)This is located in the rear ashtray. Max power: 100 W.
REAR BLIND (SALOON
pull on the tab C to unroll the blind,
position the blind on the hooks D.
LAYOUT
SUN VISOR
System which protects against sun from ahead or from the side and courtesy system with illuminated mirror.
natural_image
Close-up of a white car interior with a yellow directional arrow on the door (no text or symbols visible)With the ignition on, lift the flap; the mirror is illuminated automatically.
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold the visor downwards.
It can be disengaged from its central fixing and pivoted over to the side windows if required.
AIR CONDITIONED GLOVEBOX
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled buttons and control panel (no readable text or symbols)To open the glovebox, pull on the handle and lower the lid.
The glovebox has a manually closable air conditioning vent B.
It has 2 or 3 sockets C to connect audio/video equipment.
It has automatic lighting.
SKI FLAP
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat assembly with silver leather seats and a black seat cover (no visible text or symbols)A flap in the backrest, located to the rear of the armrest, facilitates the carrying of long objects.
To open
Lower the rear armrest.
Pull the fl ap handle down.
Lower the flap.
Load the objects from inside the boot.
Whilst driving, the glove-box should be kept closed.
Ensure that the objects are well secured and that they do not impede the operation of the gear lever.
LAYOUT
MATS
natural_image
Close-up of a car's backrest panel with visible mounting holes and side brackets (no text or symbols)Equipment available for the driver and front passenger.
Removing
Slide the seat back as far as possible,
unclip the fi xings,
remove the fi xings, then the mat.
Refi tting
Position the mat correctly,
clip the fi xings,
check that the mat is held is place correctly.
To avoid your feet becoming jammed under the pedals:
- only use mats which are suitable for the fixings already present in the vehicle. The use of these fixings is essential,
- never stack up more than 1 mat.
The use of a mat not approved by CITROËN may obstruct access to the pedals and hinder the cruise control/speed limiter function.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN are fitted with a 3rd fi xing located in the pedal area to avoid any risk of interference with the pedals.
FRONT ARMREST
natural_image
Close-up of a car headrest lever with a yellow circular indicator labeled 'A' (no text or symbols beyond the label)Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.
Adjustment
To optimise your driving position:
lift the control A,
push the armrest forwards.
The armrest returns to its initial position when you push it rearwards.
Cup-holder
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a black plastic seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)F Lift the armrest to access the cup holder.
LAYOUT
MATS
natural_image
Close-up of a car's backrest panel with visible mounting holes and side brackets (no text or symbols)Equipment available for the driver and front passenger.
Removing
Slide the seat back as far as possible,
unclip the fi xings,
remove the fi xings, then the mat.
Refi tting
Position the mat correctly,
clip the fi xings,
check that the mat is held is place correctly.
To avoid your feet becoming jammed under the pedals:
- only use mats which are suitable for the fixings already present in the vehicle. The use of these fixings is essential,
- never stack up more than 1 mat.
The use of a mat not approved by CITROËN may obstruct access to the pedals and hinder the cruise control/speed limiter function.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN are fitted with a 3rd fi xing located in the pedal area to avoid any risk of interference with the pedals.
FRONT ARMREST
natural_image
Close-up of a car headrest lever with a yellow circular indicator labeled 'A' (no text or symbols beyond the label)Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.
Adjustment
To optimise your driving position:
lift the control A,
push the armrest forwards.
The armrest returns to its initial position when you push it rearwards.
Cup-holder
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a black plastic seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)F Lift the armrest to access the cup holder.
LAYOUT
Driver's oddments tray
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols√ Pull the handle towards you.
Cup-holder
The rear cup-holder A is located in the rear central armrest.
Lower the rear armrest.
^cF Pull forwards to extract the cup-holder.
Storage
Lift up the upper part of the rear central armrest to access storage space B.
SIDE BLIN
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the back panel with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)Pull on the tab A and position the blind on the hook B.
REAR ARMREST
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with labeled components A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)Comfort and storage system for the rear passengers.
12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)This is located in the rear ashtray. Max power: 100 W.
REAR BLIND (SALOON
pull on the tab C to unroll the blind,
position the blind on the hooks D.
LAYOUT
Driver's oddments tray
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols√ Pull the handle towards you.
Cup-holder
The rear cup-holder A is located in the rear central armrest.
Lower the rear armrest.
^cF Pull forwards to extract the cup-holder.
Storage
Lift up the upper part of the rear central armrest to access storage space B.
SIDE BLIN
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the back panel with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)Pull on the tab A and position the blind on the hook B.
REAR ARMREST
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with labeled components A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)Comfort and storage system for the rear passengers.
12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)This is located in the rear ashtray. Max power: 100 W.
REAR BLIND (SALOON
pull on the tab C to unroll the blind,
position the blind on the hooks D.
LAYOUT
BOOT LAYOUT (SALC
natural_image
Close-up of a car trunk with two yellow circular markers labeled 1 and 2, showing interior compartments (no text or symbols beyond labels)-
Battery for vehicles with V6 HDi engine.
-
Pull strap (spare wheel storage).
natural_image
Side view of a white car trunk with two yellow circular markers labeled 3 and 4 pointing to the front compartment (no text or symbols on the car itself)-
Boot lamp.
-
6 CD changer.
Luggage securing rings
Use the 4 securing rings on the boot floor to secure your luggage. For safety reasons, in case of the need for sharp braking, you are advised to place heavy objects as far forward in the boot as possible.
LAYOUT
BOOT LAYOUT (TOUF
1. Hook
Allows you to hook shopping bags.
2. Torch
To recharge, return it to its storage position.
- Storage net or Battery compartment (for vehicles with V6 2.7 HDi engine).
This provides access to the battery.
1. Luggage-cover blind
(see details on following page)
2. Luggage securing rings
Use the 4 stowing rings provided on the boot floor to secure your loads.
For safety reasons in the event of sharp braking, you are advised to place heavy objects as far forwards as possible.
3. Hooks
These allow a cargo net to be fitted (see details on following page).
1. Boot lamp
2. 12 V accessories socket (100 W maximum)
Cigar-lighter type 12 volts socket. It is located on the rear right-hand trim, and is supplied from the ignition position.
3. Loading assistance
You can change the height of the vehicle in order to make loading or unloading easier.
4. Hook
Allows you to hook shopping bags.
5. Storage net or 6 CD changer
LAYOUT
LUGGAGE COVER (TOURI)
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the rear canopy cover and a yellow circular marker labeled 'A' (no text or symbols on the main subject)To roll up
Press the handle (PRESS) gently. The luggage cover rolls up automatically.
The moving part A can be folded along the rear bench seat backrest.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a yellow pin labeled '1' on the handle (no text or symbols beyond the label)To remove
Compress the control 1 and lift the luggage cover on the right then on the left to remove it.
natural_image
Top-down view of a white car backhaul with labeled compartments (B and C) and no visible text or symbols on the vehicle itself.To install
Position the left-hand end of the luggage cover roller in its location B behind the rear bench seat.
Compress the roller control 1 and put the roller in place in its location C on the right.
Release the control to secure the luggage cover.
Unroll it to its fastening on the boot pillar.
High load retaining net (Tourer)
natural_image
Close-up of a hand holding a black cylindrical object, possibly a steering wheel or scroll (no visible text or symbols)Hooked onto the special upper and lower fixings, this permits use of the entire loading volume up to the roof:
- behind the rear seats (row 2), - behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear seats are folded. When positioning the net, check that the strap loops are visible from the boot; this will make slackening or tightening easier.
LAYOUT
natural_image
Top-down and side-view diagrams of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and rear seats (no text or symbols)Installation
fold down the backs of the rear seats,
position the high load retaining net roller above the two rails 1 located behind the rear seats (2/3 bench seat). The two notches 2 must be placed above the two rails,
slide the two rails 1 into the notches 2 and push the roller (lengthways) from right to left to secure it,
reposition the rear seat backs.
Row 1 Row 2
To use it in row 1:
fold down the backs of the rear seats,
3 open the covers 3 of the corresponding upper fi xings,
unroll the high load retaining net and position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding fixing cover. Check that the hook is secured in the rail located inside the cover 3,
pull the high load retaining net's metal bar to position the other hook in the second fixing cover.
To use it in row 2: * open the covers 4 of the corresponding upper fi xings,
from the rear bench seat, unroll the high load retaining net, pushing it to detach it from the retaining hooks,
position one of the ends of the net's metal bar in the corresponding fixing cover. Check that the hook is secured in the rail located inside the cover,
2" position the other hook in the second fi xing cover and pull the metal bar towards you.
CHILD SAFETY
GENERAL POINTS RELA TO CHILD SEATS
Although one of CITROËN's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please follow these precautions:
- in accordance with European regulations, all children under the age of 12 or less than one metre fi fty tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight, on seats fi tted with a seat belt or ISOFIX* mountings,
- statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for the transportation of children are the rear seats.
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the "rearwards-facing" position both in the front and in the rear.
INSTALLING A CHILD SEAT USING A THREE POINT SEAT BELT
"Rearwards-facing"
When a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, it is essential that the passenger air bag is disarmed. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the air bag were to inflate.
"Forwards-facing"
When a "forwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal position with the seat back upright and leave the passenger air bag armed.
Intermediate longitudinal position
CITROËN recommends that children should travel in the rear seats of your vehicle:
- "rearwards-facing" up to the age of 2,
- "forwards-facing" over the age of 2.
* The rules for transporting children are specific to each country. Consult the current legislation in your country.
natural_image
Close-up of a car door panel with measurement markings (no text or symbols visible)CHILD SAFETY
Passenger air bag OFF
CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN
CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt :
Group 0: from birth to 10 kg Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" Installed in the rearwards-facing position.
L2
"KIDDY Life" The use of the restraining cushion is compulsory for the transportation of young children (from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L3
"RECARO Start"
natural_image
Blue and white car seatbelt device (no text or symbols visible)L4
"KLIPPAN Optima" From the age of 6 years (approximately 22 kg), the booster is used on its own.
CHILD SAFETY
CHILD SEATS FITTED BY MEANS OF THE VEHICLE SEA
In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of universally approved child seats (a) using a seat belt, depending on the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.
| Seat position(s) | Weight of child | |||||
| Groups 0 (c) and 0+ < 13 kg | Group 1 9 to 18 kg | Group 2 15 to 25 kg | Group 3 22 to 36 kg | |||
| 7 | Row 1 | Front passenger (b) with height adjustment | U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R) | |||
| Front passenger (b) without height adjustment | U U U U | |||||
| Row 2 | Lateral rear U | U U U | ||||
| Central rear U | U U U | |||||
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Consult the current legislation for your country before driving with your child in this seat.
(c) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Shells and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
U: seat position suitable for installation of universally approved rearwards-facing and/or forwards-facing child seat.
U (R): As U, with the vehicle seat, which must be adjusted to the highest position.
CHILD SAFETY
"ISOFIX" MOUI
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the new ISOFIX regulation s.
The rear side seats and the front passenger seat are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings.
natural_image
Top-down view of a car with four yellow-labeled compartments (no text or symbols visible)In the front
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with labeled buttons and letter 'A' (no text or symbols beyond labels)
natural_image
Close-up of a car seat with visible brake feet and a yellow label pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols beyond the label)These are three rings for the front passenger seat:
- two rings A, located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a label,
- a ring B, fixed at the bottom of the rear of the seat back, used to secure the upper strap of the child seat.
In the rear
Saloon
These are three rings for each rear side seat:
- two lower rings C, located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a label,
- an upper ring D, fixed to the rear shelf, concealed under a flap with the logo TOP TETHER behind the head restraint.
Tourer
- two lower rings C, located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a label,
- an upper ring E, fixed to the roof on the boot side, concealed under a flap with the logo TOP TETHER.
CHILD SAFETY
This ISOFIX mounting system guarantees you fast, reliable and safe fi tting of the child seat in your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two locks which are secured easily on the two rings A or C, following installation of the guides (supplied with the seat).
Some also have an upper strap which is attached to the ring B, D or E.
To attach this strap in the front, raise the vehicle seat's head restraint and pass the upper strap between the rods of the head restraint. Then fi x the hook on the ring B and tighten the upper strap.
To attach this strap in the rear, remove the vehicle seat's head restraint and stow it. Lift the cover on the rear shelf (Saloon) or the roof (Tourer). Then fix the hook on the ring D or E and tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.
For information regarding the ISOFIX child seats which can be installed in your vehicle, consult the summary table for the location of the ISOFIX child seats.
ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack in relation to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys.
For optimum installation of the "forwards-facing" child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is in contact with the back of the vehicle's seat and that the head restraint does not cause any discomfort.
If the head restraint has to be removed, ensure that it is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking.
Children under the age of 10 must not travel in the "forwards-facing" position on the front passenger seat, unless the rear seats are already occupied by other children, cannot be used or are absent.
Disarm the passenger air bag* when a "rearwards-facing" child seat is installed on the front seat. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the air bag were to inflate.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs.
CITROËN recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- one or more children alone and unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors, use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fi t side blinds on the rear windows.
* According to country and current local legislation.
CHILD SAFETY
ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEI
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
natural_image
Illustration of two baby car seats, one blue and one orange, with no text or symbols present.Installed in the forwards-facing position.
Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B, D or E, referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
CHILD SAFETY
In conformity with European law (ECE 16), this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of ISOFIX child seats to seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX anchoring points.
For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defined by a letter from A to G, is shown on the child seat to the right of the ISOFIX logo.
| Weight of child/Age given as a guide | ||||||||||
| Up to 10 kg (group 0) Up to around 6 months | Up to 10 kg (group 0) Up to 13 kg (group 0+) Up to around 1 year | 9 to 18 kg (group 1) Approx 1 to 3 years | ||||||||
| Type of ISOFIX child seat | Shell | "Rearwards-facing" | "Rearwards-facing" | "Forwards-facing" | ||||||
| ISOFIX size class | F | G | C | D | E | C | D | A | B | B1 |
| Universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats can be installed on: - Front passenger seat | X | IL-SU | IL-SU | IUF/IL-SU | ||||||
| - Lateral rear seats | IL-SU* | IL-SU | IL-SU | IUF/IL-SU | ||||||
| - Central rear seat | Non ISOFIX seat | |||||||||
IUF: Seat position suitable for installation of an Isofix Universal "Forwards-facing" seat attached using the top tether.
IL-SU: Seat position suitable for installation of an ISOFIX Semi-Universal child seat, either:
- "rearwards-facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support,
- "forwards-facing" fitted with a support,
- a shell fitted with an upper strap or a support.
To attach the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" paragraph.
X: Seat not suitable for installation of an ISOFIX seat of the size class indicated
* The ISOFIX shell, fi xed to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.
CHILD SAFETY
ELECTRIC CHILD LO
Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls and use of the rear electric windows.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's dashboard with a control panel and a yellow indicator button (no text or symbols visible)The control is located on the driver's door, with the electric window controls.
Activation
Press button A.
The indicator light on button A comes on, accompanied by a message on the instrument panel display.
Deactivation
Press button A again.
The indicator light on button A switches off, accompanied by a message on the instrument panel display.
This indicator light remains off until the child lock is activated.
Any other status of the indicator light indicates a malfunction of the electric child lock. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is deactivated automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.
SAFETY
DIRECTION INDICA
Selection of the left or right direction indicators to signal a change of direction of the vehicle.
Lower the lights stalk fully when moving to the left.
Raise the lights stalk fully when moving to the right.
"Motorway" function
System for indicating a change of lane on a motorway.
Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the resistance point; the direction indicators will fl ash 3 times.
This function can be used at any speed, but it is particularly useful when changing lane on high-speed roads.
HAZARD WARNING LIG
A visual warning by means of the direction indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a red indicator light and a yellow arrow labeled 'A' pointing to the control panel (no readable text or symbols beyond labels)Press button A, the direction indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic lighting of hazard warning lights
When braking in an emergency, depending on the deceleration, the hazard warning lights come on.
They will switch off automatically the first time you accelerate.
If they do not, press button A to switch the direction indicators off.
As a safety precaution in a traffic jam, switch on the hazard warning lights if you are the last in the queue.
H
Audible warning to alert other road users to an imminent danger.
Press the left or right-hand part of the fixed centred controls steering wheel.
Use the horn moderately and only in the following cases:
- immediate danger,
- when approaching an area
- where there is no visibility.
SAFETY
DEFLATION DETEC1
System which automatically checks the pressure of the tyres while driving.
Choice of detection
This function warns you of tyres that are deflated or punctured.
Automatic detection
Sensors monitor the tyre pressures. In the event of an anomaly, a message will appear on the instrument panel screen.
Driver request detection
You can check the tyre pressures at any given moment.
Press on button A (CHECK); the information will be displayed on the instrument panel screen.
Display of tyres in good condition
Press on button A (CHECK). The system indicates to you that the tyres are correctly inflated.
This information is only available on the request of the driver.
Deflated tyre
automatic detection
detection on request
Automatic detection:
A message indicates to you which tyre is deflated.
Driver request detection:
The vehicle outline indicates the deflated tyre(s).
The message is accompanied by the SERVICE warning lamp lighting up and a beep.
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
SAFETY
Punctured tyre
automatic detection
Wheel not detected
automatic detection
detection on request
detection on request
Automatic detection:
A message indicates to you which tyre is punctured.
Automatic detection:
A message indicates to you which wheel is not detected.
Driver request detection:
The vehicle outline indicates the punctured tyre(s).
The message is accompanied by the STOP warning lamp lighting up and a beep.
Driver request detection:
The vehicle outline indicates the wheel(s) which is/are not detected.
The message is accompanied by the SERVICE warning lamp lighting up and an audible beep. Consult a CITROËN dealer.
If you have fitted wheels that are not equipped with tyre deflation detection (wheels with snow tyres, etc.), contact a CITROËN dealer.
The deflation detection system is a driving aid, but which does not absolve the driver from the need to be vigilant and responsible.
This system does not dispense with the requirement to check the tyres on a regular basis (see "Vehicle identifi cation"), to make sure that the vehicle is behaving correctly and to avoid premature tyre wear arising from driving too fast etc.
Do not forget to check the pressure in the spare wheel.
Any repair or replacement of a tyre on a wheel that is equipped with a sensor must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer.
The system may suffer from temporary interference caused by radio transmissions on neighbouring frequencies.
SAFETY
Group of supplementary systems which help you to obtain optimum braking in complete safety in emergency situations:
- the anti-lock braking system (ABS),
- the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- the emergency braking assistance (EBA).
Anti-lock braking system and electronic brake force distribution
Linked systems which improve the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking, in particular on poor or slippery surfaces.
Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes into operation automatically when there is a risk of wheel lock.
Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibration of the brake pedal.
When braking in an emergency, press very firmly without releasing the pressure.
Operating fault
If this warning light comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the instrument panel dis-
play, it indicates a malfunction of the anti-lock braking system which could result in loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
If this warning light comes on, together with the STOP and ABS warning lights, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message on the instrument panel display, it indicates a malfunction of the electronic brake force distribution which could result in loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a CITROËN dealer.
When replacing wheels (tyres and rims), ensure that they conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Emergency braking assistance
System which, in an emergency, enables you to obtain the optimum braking pressure more quickly, thus reducing the stopping distance.
Activation
It is triggered by the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed.
The effect of this is a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in braking efficiency.
When braking in an emergency, press firmly without releasing the pressure.
SAFETY
TRAJECTORY COI SYSTEMS
Anti-skid regulation (ASR) and electronic stability programme (ESP)
The anti-skid regulation optimises traction to prevent skidding of the wheels, by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine.
The electronic stability programme acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to keep the vehicle on the trajectory required by the driver.
Snow driving assistance (SNOW MOTION)
Your vehicle has a system to help driving on snow: SNOW MOTION.
This automatic system continuously checks for situations of diffi cult surface adhesion that could make it diffi cult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow.
In these situations, the SNOW MOTION system takes over from the ASR system by optimising the amount of wheel slip to provide the best traction and trajectory control, even without snow tyres and with or without chains.
For vehicles with Hydractive III+ suspension, manual adjustment of ground clearance to the intermediate position improves further the ability to make progress in deep snow (see the relevant paragraph).
In extremely severe conditions (snow on top of ice, sand, deep mud...), it can be useful to deactivate the ESP/ASR systems to allow a degree of wheel spin and so recover grip.
Activation
These systems are activated automatically each time the vehicle is started.
They come into operation in the event of a grip or trajectory problem.
This is indicated by flashing of this warning light on the instrument panel.
Disarming
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to disarm the ASR and ESP systems, so that the wheels can move freely and regain grip.
Press the "ESP OFF" button, located in the centre of the fascia.
If this warning light comes on on the instrument panel and the indicator light on the button comes on, this indicates that the ASR and ESP systems are disarmed.
SAFETY
Reactivation
These systems are reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h).
Press the "ESP OFF" button again to reactivate them manually.
Operating fault
If this warning light comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction display,
this indicates a malfunction of these systems.
Have the systems checked by a CITROËN dealer.
The ESP/ASR systems offer exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed.
The correct functioning of these systems depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the CITROËN assembly and operation procedures.
After an impact, have these systems checked by a CITROËN dealer.
SEAT BE
natural_image
Car seat assembly diagram showing a car seat, seatbelt, and seatbelt connector (no text or symbols)Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning system and force limiter.
This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front impact.
Depending on the seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belt against the body of the occupant.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt against the chest of the occupant, so increasing his protection.
Fastening
: Pull the belt down in front of you in a steady movement, making sure that it does not become twisted.
Press the fastening into its buckle.
Check that it is properly secured and that the automatic locking mechanism operates correctly by pulling sharply on the belt strap.
The abdominal part of the strap should be positioned as low down as possible in the lap and as tight as possible.
The chest part should be positioned if possible in the channel of the shoulder.
Each belt has a reel that adjusts its length automatically to the girth of the seat occupant.
SAFETY
Reactivation
These systems are reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h).
Press the "ESP OFF" button again to reactivate them manually.
Operating fault
If this warning light comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction display,
this indicates a malfunction of these systems.
Have the systems checked by a CITROËN dealer.
The ESP/ASR systems offer exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed.
The correct functioning of these systems depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the CITROËN assembly and operation procedures.
After an impact, have these systems checked by a CITROËN dealer.
SEAT BE
natural_image
Car seat assembly diagram showing a car seat, seatbelt, and seatbelt connector (no text or symbols)Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning system and force limiter.
This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front impact.
Depending on the seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belt against the body of the occupant.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt against the chest of the occupant, so increasing his protection.
Fastening
: Pull the belt down in front of you in a steady movement, making sure that it does not become twisted.
Press the fastening into its buckle.
Check that it is properly secured and that the automatic locking mechanism operates correctly by pulling sharply on the belt strap.
The abdominal part of the strap should be positioned as low down as possible in the lap and as tight as possible.
The chest part should be positioned if possible in the channel of the shoulder.
Each belt has a reel that adjusts its length automatically to the girth of the seat occupant.
SAFETY
Height adjustment
natural_image
Close-up of a white and black car seatbelt buckle with yellow directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)The correct positioning of the seat belt reel is around mid-shoulder level.
F To adjust the belt, pinch the control and slide it in the direction required.
Rear seat belts
Each rear seat is fitted with a three-point inertia reel seat belt with force limiter.
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Unfastening
To unfasten the belt, press on the red button in the buckle.
The belt retracts automatically when not in use.
SAFETY
The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all restrained securely before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys.
Do not invert the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stored automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is rolled up correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling rapidly on the strap and releasing it.
In order to be effective, a seat belt:
- must be tightened as close to the body as possible,
- must restrain one person of adult size only,
- must not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- must be pulled in front of you with a smooth movement, checking that it does not twist,
- must not be transformed or modified to avoid altering its performance.
In accordance with current safety regulations, all repairs and checks must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer who guarantees that the work is carried out correctly.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by a CITROËN dealer and particularly if the straps show signs of damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by CITROËN dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and rolled up correctly.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one metre fifty.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impacts, the pretensioning device may be triggered before and independently of the air bags. Triggering of the pre-tensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the air bag warning light comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer.
SAFETY
AIR BAGS
System designed to maximise the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. It supplements the action of the force-limiting seat belts.
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the air bags are triggered instantly and protect the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the air bags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the air bags will not be triggered; the seat belt alone is sufficient to provide optimum protection in these situations.
The air bags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only operate once. If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the air bag will not operate.
Impact detection zones
natural_image
Top-down view of a car with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols on the car itself)A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Triggering of the air bag(s) is accompanied by a slight emission of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation.
The noise of the detonation may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
Front air bags
System which protects the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in the event of a front impact.
The driver's air bag is incorporated in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's air bag is incorporated in the fascia above the glove box.
natural_image
Illustration of two identical figures with raised hands, viewed from above (no text or symbols)Activation
The air bags are triggered simultaneously, unless the passenger's front air bag is disarmed, in the event of a serious front impact applied to all or part of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle.
The front air bag inflates between the front occupant of the vehicle and the fascia to cushion his forward movement.
SAFETY
Deactivation
Only the front passenger's air bag can be disarmed:
with the ignition off, insert the key in the passenger air bag dis- arming switch 1,
F turn it to the "OFF" position,
F then, remove the key keeping
the switch in this position.
This warning light comes on on the roof console display when the ignition is on and until the air bag is re-armed.
To guarantee the safety of your child, it is imperative that the passenger air bag is disarmed when you install a "rearwards-facing" child seat on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the air bag were triggered.
Activation
When you remove the child seat, turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to re-arm the air bag and so guarantee the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.
Operating fault
If this symbol appears on the instrument panel display, accompanied by an audible warning and a mes-
sage, contact a CITROËN dealer to have the system checked. The air bags may no longer be triggered in the event of a serious impact.
If this warning light fl ashes, contact a CITROËN dealer.
If both air bag warning lights come on continuously, do not install a "rearwards-facing" child seat on the front passenger seat.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
SAFETY
For the air bags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not leave anything between the occupants and the air bags (a child, pet, object...). This could hamper the operation of the air bags or injure the occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the air bag systems checked.
All work on the air bag system is strictly forbidden unless it is carried out by qualified personnel of the CITROËN network.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an air bag is triggered cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.
Front air bags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the fascia.
Smoke as little as possible as deployment of the air bags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.
Side air bags
Put approved covers only on the seats. These will not hinder inflation of the side air bags. Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Do not fix or glue anything to the seat backs. This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the side air bag is triggered.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain air bags
Do not fix or glue anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain air bag is triggered.
Do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain air bags.
SAFETY
Side air bags \*
System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest.
Each side air bag is incorporated in the front seat back frame, on the door side.
natural_image
Top-down view of a car with two yellow arrows indicating downward motion, labeled 'B' (no text or symbols on the car itself)Activation
It is triggered unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.
The side air bag inflates between the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim pad.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Curtain air bags \*
System which protects the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of head injuries.
Each curtain air bag is incorporated in the pillars and the upper part of the passenger compartment.
Activation
It is triggered at the same time as the corresponding side air bag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain air bag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the air bag may not be triggered.
The air bag is not triggered in the event of a rear or front collision.
Operating fault
If this symbol appears on the instrument panel display, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, con-
tact a CITROËN dealer to have the system checked. The air bags may no longer be triggered in the event of a serious impact.
SAFETY
For the air bags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not leave anything between the occupants and the air bags (a child, pet, object...). This could hamper the operation of the air bags or injure the occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the air bag systems checked.
All work on the air bag system is strictly forbidden unless it is carried out by qualified personnel of the CITROËN network.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an air bag is triggered cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.
Front air bags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the fascia.
Smoke as little as possible as deployment of the air bags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.
Side air bags
Put approved covers only on the seats. These will not hinder inflation of the side air bags. Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Do not fix or glue anything to the seat backs. This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the side air bag is triggered.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain air bags
Do not fix or glue anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain air bag is triggered.
Do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain air bags.
DRIVING
natural_image
Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a yellow arrow pointing to the wheel (no visible text or symbols)Mechanical device for immobilising the vehicle when stationary.
Release
Press on the end of the lever whilst pulling it then lower it fully.
This warning lamp comes on if the parking brake is engaged or not fully released.
If the parking brake is released, the lighting of this warning lamp along with the STOP warning lamp indicates an insufficient level of brake fluid or a malfunction of the braking distribution.
It is essential to stop the vehicle.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Application
Pull the parking brake to immobilise your vehicle.
To facilitate the action on the lever, you are recommended to press the brake pedal at the same time.
In all circumstances, as a precautionary measure, engage first gear.
On steep gradients, turn the steering wheel towards the pavement.
DRIVING
The electronic parking brake combines 2 operational modes:
- AUTOMATIC
Automatic application when the engine stops and automatic release on use of the accelerator (automatic operation by default), MANUAL
Permanent manual application/ release of the parking brake is possible by pulling control A while pressing the brake pedal.
Automatic operation
Application with the engine off
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is automatically applied when the engine is switched off.
The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:
- the lighting of the warning lamp on control A and on the instrument panel,
- the display of a message "parking brake applied" on the instrument panel display.
An operation sound will confirm to you the application/release of your electronic parking brake.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that warning lamp P on the instrument panel is permanently lit.
Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.
Application with the engine running
With the engine running and the vehicle stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle you need to manually apply the parking brake by pulling on control A.
The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:
- the lighting of warning lamp P on control A and on the instrument panel,
- the display of a message "parking brake applied" on the instrument panel display.
When the driver's door is opened, a beep is heard and a message displayed if the parking brake has not been applied.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that warning lamp P on the instrument panel is permanently lit.
DRIVING
Release
The electronic parking brake releases automatically and progressively when you press the accelerator:
with a manual gearbox (first gear or reverse gear engaged), press down fully on the clutch pedal then press on the accelerator pedal and move off.
with an automatic gearbox, accelerate with the selector in position D, M or R.
Full release of the parking brake is confirmed by:
- the extinction of warning lamp P on control A and on the instrument panel,
- the display of a message "parking brake released" on the instrument panel display.
When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily (particularly when starting the engine, including in neutral), as you may release the parking brake.
Activation/Deactivation of the automatic functions
The automatic application when the engine is switched off and the automatic release when you press the accelerator can be deactivated. Activation/deactivation is performed using the configuration menu of the instrument panel display. To do so, select "Personalisation/Confi guration/Defi ne the Vehicle parameters/Driving assistance/Automatic handbrake".
The deactivation of these functions is confirmed by the lighting of this warning lamp on the instrument panel.
With the automatic functions deactivated, the application and release of the parking brake are done manually.
The deactivation of the automatic functions is recommended in particularly cold conditions (ice) and during towing (breakdown, caravan...).
Manual operation
Manual application/release of the parking brake is always possible.
Application
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking brake whether the engine is running or off, pull on control A.
The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:
the lighting of the warning lamp on control A and of warning lamp P on the instrument panel,
- the display of a message "parking brake applied" on the instrument panel display.
When the driver's door is opened with the engine running, a beep is heard and
a message displayed if the parking brake has not been applied.
DRIVING
Release
The electronic parking brake releases automatically and progressively when you press the accelerator:
with a manual gearbox (first gear or reverse gear engaged), press down fully on the clutch pedal then press on the accelerator pedal and move off.
with an automatic gearbox, accelerate with the selector in position D, M or R.
Full release of the parking brake is confirmed by:
- the extinction of warning lamp P on control A and on the instrument panel,
- the display of a message "parking brake released" on the instrument panel display.
When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily (particularly when starting the engine, including in neutral), as you may release the parking brake.
Activation/Deactivation of the automatic functions
The automatic application when the engine is switched off and the automatic release when you press the accelerator can be deactivated. Activation/deactivation is performed using the configuration menu of the instrument panel display. To do so, select "Personalisation/Confi guration/Defi ne the Vehicle parameters/Driving assistance/Automatic handbrake".
The deactivation of these functions is confirmed by the lighting of this warning lamp on the instrument panel.
With the automatic functions deactivated, the application and release of the parking brake are done manually.
The deactivation of the automatic functions is recommended in particularly cold conditions (ice) and during towing (breakdown, caravan...).
Manual operation
Manual application/release of the parking brake is always possible.
Application
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking brake whether the engine is running or off, pull on control A.
The application of the parking brake is confirmed by:
the lighting of the warning lamp on control A and of warning lamp P on the instrument panel,
- the display of a message "parking brake applied" on the instrument panel display.
When the driver's door is opened with the engine running, a beep is heard and
a message displayed if the parking brake has not been applied.
DRIVING
Release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to release the parking brake, press on the brake pedal, push then release control A.
The full application of the parking brake is confirmed by:
- the extinction of the warning lamp on control A and of warning lamp P on the instrument panel,
- the display of a message "parking brake released" on the instrument panel display.
If you push control A without pressing the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be released and the message "Foot on brake necessary" will be displayed on the instrument panel.
When stationary, with the engine running, do not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, as you may release the parking brake.
Maximum application
If necessary, you can utilise maximum application of the parking brake. It is obtained by means of a long pull on control A, until you see the message "Max application of the parking brake" and a beep is heard.
Maximum application is essential:
- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan or a trailer, if the automatic functions are activated but you are applying the parking brake manually,
- when the gradient you are parked on is variable in its effect (e.g. on a ferry, in a lorry, during towing).
- In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or parking on a gradient, turn the front wheels towards the pavement and engage a gear when you park.
- After a maximum application, the release time will be longer.
Particular situations
In certain situations (starting the engine...), the parking brake can automatically alter its force. This is normal operation.
To advance your vehicle a few centimetres without starting the engine, but with the ignition on, press on the brake pedal and release the parking brake by pushing then releasing control A.
The full release of the parking brake is confirmed by the extinction of warning lamp P (red) on the instrument panel and the display of a message "parking brake released" on the instrument panel display.
If the parking brake malfunctions while applied or if the battery runs flat, an emergency release is always possible.
To guarantee correct operation of the parking brake and therefore your safety, the number of successive application/release operations is limited to eight.
If this number is exceeded, you are warned by the message "Parking brake faulty" and a warning lamp fl ashes.
DRIVING
Dynamic emergency braking
In the event of a failure of the vehicle's main braking system or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction, etc) pull and hold control A to stop the vehicle.
The electronic stability programme (ESP) provides stability during dynamic emergency braking.
If the dynamic emergency braking malfunctions, one of the following messages will be displayed on the instrument panel display:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".
If a failure of the ESP system is signalled by the lighting of this warning lamp, then braking stability is not
guaranteed. In this event, stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull release" actions on control A.
The dynamic emergency braking must only be used in exceptional circumstances.
Emergency unlocking
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with a yellow circular marker labeled 'A' pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols on the main body)In the event of the electronic parking brake malfunctioning or the battery running flat, an emergency manual device can unlock the parking brake.
Immobilise the vehicle, with the engine running, by engaging first gear (manual gearbox) or position P (automatic gearbox), then switch off the engine.
If it is impossible to immobilise the vehicle, do not action the control and urgently contact a CITROËN dealer.
DRIVING
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a black plastic seat with a yellow directional arrow labeled 'B' pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols beyond label)Fetch the vehicle chock located in the boot.
Immobilise the vehicle by placing the chock at the front or at the rear of one of the rear wheels.
Open the lower compartment of the centre armrest by pulling it.
Ensure that the cup holder B is retracted.
Remove the rubber mat covering the base of the armrest.
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with labeled buttons (C and D) on the shaft (no text or symbols beyond labels)Release the strap from its location C.
Pull the strap to release the brake. A loud knock confi rms the release of the brake.
Take care to put the strap back in its location C correctly. Otherwise, it will no longer be possible to apply the brake. Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Put the rubber mat back in place on the base of the armrest.
Remove and stow the chock.
This strap does not permit application of the parking brake.
To re-engage the electronic parking brake (after rectifying the malfunction or battery failure), give a long pull on the control A until the parking brake warning lamp (!) fl ashes on the instrument panel then give a second long pull until this warning lamp is lit permanently.
The time required for the subsequent application may be longer than during normal operation.
It is essential that the ignition is not switched on until the parking brake has re-engaged (fl ashing of the warning lamp (!) on the instrument panel then warning lamp lit permanently) to avoid damage to the parking brake.
Take care not to allow moisture or dust in the proximity of the diagnostic socket D which is essential for the maintenance of your vehicle.
DRIVING
Operating anomalies
If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
| SITUATION | CONSEQUENCES | ||
| 1 | Electronic parking brake fault and display of message " Parking brake faulty" and the following warning lamps: | If the electronic parking brake fault warning lamp and the service warning lamp light up, position the vehicle in a safe location (on fl at ground, with a gear engaged). | |
 |  | ||
| 2 | Display of the messages " Parking brake faulty" and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the following warning lamps: | - The automatic functions are deactivated.- The hill start assist is unavailable.- The electronic parking brake is only available manually. | |
 |  | ||
| 3 | Display of messages " Parking brake faulty" and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the following warning lamp: | - The manual unlocking of the electronic parking brake is unavailable.- The hill start assist is unavailable.- The automatic functions and manual application are still available. | |
 | |||
DRIVING
4
SITUATION
Display of messages "Parking brake faulty" and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the following warning lamps:
and/or
fl ashing
5
Display of message " Parking brake control faulty – automatic mode activated " and the following warning lamps:
and/or
fl ashing
6
Display of message " Parking brake faulty " and of the following warning lamp:
fl ashing
7
Battery fault - Lighting of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop the
- The automatic functions are deactivated. - The hill start assist is unavailable.
To apply the electronic parking brake:
Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition
Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum application.
Switch on the ignition and check that the electronic parking brake warning lamps are on.
- Application may take longer than in normal operation.
- If warning lamp (!) flashes or if the warning lamps do not come on when the ignition is switched on, this method does not work. Have it checked by a CITROEN dealer.
To release the electronic parking brake:
Switch on the ignition.
Push the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.
- Only the functions for automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on acceleration are available.
- Manual application/release of the electronic parking brake and dynamic emergency braking are unavailable.
- Application of the parking brake is not guaranteed.
- The parking brake is temporarily unavailable.
It this situation arises:
Wait approximately 3 minutes.
After 3 minutes, if the warning lamp is still flashing, try to reinitialise the parking brake, either by pushing and releasing the control A while pressing the brake pedal or by means of a long pull on control A.
vehicle as soon as traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle.
- Apply the electronic parking brake before switching off the engine.
DRIVING
HILL START ASS
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal,
- in particular conditions on a slope,
- with the driver's door closed.
The hill start assist function cannot be deactivated.
Operation
natural_image
Illustration of a silver sedan driving on a road with a yellow traffic sign indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)On an ascending slope, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a brief moment when you release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral on a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in D or M on an automatic gearbox.
natural_image
Illustration of a silver sedan driving on a road with a yellow directional arrow (no text or symbols)On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for a brief moment when you release the brake pedal.
Do not exit the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to exit the vehicle with the engine running, manually apply the parking brake and ensure that the parking brake warning lamp (on the instrument panel) and the warning lamp P (on the control lever A) are permanently on.
DRIVING
5-SPEED MANUAL GEARI
natural_image
Close-up of a car gear shift lever with numbered arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols on the lever itself)Starting the vehicle
Check that the gear lever is in neutral.
Do not touch the accelerator.
For Diesel engines: turn the key to position M and wait until the pre-heating warning light switches off if it has come on.
Operate the starter, turning the key until the engine starts (no more than ten seconds).
In temperatures lower than 0 °C, declutch whilst turning the starter to facilitate starting.
Engaging reverse gear
Push the gear lever to the right then rearwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
6-SPEED MANUAL GEARI
natural_image
Close-up of a car gear shift lever with numbered arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)Engaging reverse gear
F Raise the ring under the knob and push the gear lever to the left then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
AUTOMATIC GEAR
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever and side panel (no visible text or symbols)Automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation, enhanced by the sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing.
Therefore, you have a choice of four driving modes:
- automatic operation for electronic control of the gears by the gearbox,
- the SPORT programme for a more dynamic driving style,
- the SNOW programme to improve driving when the grip is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver.
DRIVING
5-SPEED MANUAL GEARI
natural_image
Close-up of a car gear shift lever with numbered arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols on the lever itself)Starting the vehicle
Check that the gear lever is in neutral.
Do not touch the accelerator.
For Diesel engines: turn the key to position M and wait until the pre-heating warning light switches off if it has come on.
Operate the starter, turning the key until the engine starts (no more than ten seconds).
In temperatures lower than 0 °C, declutch whilst turning the starter to facilitate starting.
Engaging reverse gear
Push the gear lever to the right then rearwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
6-SPEED MANUAL GEARI
Engaging reverse gear
F Raise the ring under the knob and push the gear lever to the left then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
AUTOMATIC GEAR
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever and side panel (no visible text or symbols)Automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation, enhanced by the sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing.
Therefore, you have a choice of four driving modes:
- automatic operation for electronic control of the gears by the gearbox,
- the SPORT programme for a more dynamic driving style,
- the SNOW programme to improve driving when the grip is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver.
DRIVING
Mode selection
automatic mode: selector in position D,
sequential mode: selector in position M.
SPORT mode: selector in position D and button A pressed,
SNOW mode: selector in position D and button B pressed.
Displays on the instrument panel
The position of the selector and the driving mode are displayed on the instrument panel dial C.
A position grille relating to the selector allows you to view the position that is selected.
For safety:
- position P can be dis- engaged only if you press the brake pedal,
- when a door is opened, a sound signal is heard if the selector is not in position P,
- always make sure that the selector is in position P before you leave your vehicle.
If the gearbox is in position P but the position of the selector is different, reposition the selector on P so that you can start the vehicle.
DRIVING
Moving off
To start the engine, the selector has to be in position P or N.
Action the starter.
When the engine is running, place the selector on R, D or M as required.
Check, in the instrument panel, the position engaged.
Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
To avoid incoherence between the position of the selector and the actual position of the gearbox, always exit from position P when you switch on the ignition and press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, when the ignition is on or the engine is running:
^F reposition the selector in position P,
put your foot on the brake pedal and then select the gear you want.
Park
This position of the selector is used to prevent the vehicle from moving when you are stationary.
To select position P, move the selector back to the highest position (towards R), then push it forwards and then to the left.
To exit position P, move the selector to the right and then to the position you want.
Only engage this position when the vehicle is completely stationary. In this position, the front wheels are locked. Make sure that the selector is correctly positioned.
Reverse gear
Only engage this position when the vehicle is stationary. To prevent snatching, do not accelerate too soon after selection.
Neutral
Never select position N if the vehicle is moving.
Never select positions P or R if the vehicle is not stationary.
If, while the vehicle is moving, position N is engaged inadvertently, allow the engine to idle before engaging position D or M.
DRIVING
Automatic operation
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with control panel and directional indicator (no text or symbols on the main component)Move the selector to position D. The gearbox constantly selects the gear that is best suited to the following parameters:
- driving style,
- road profi le
- vehicle load.
The gearbox operates without requiring any intervention on your part.
For certain manoeuvres (for example overtaking), you can obtain maximum acceleration by pressing the accelerator pedal hard down past the mechanical force zone (point of resistance), which then produces an automatic change down to a lower gear.
When braking, the gearbox may change down automatically in order to provide effective engine braking. If you lift your foot off the accelerator abruptly, the gearbox will not engage a higher gear.
Manual operation
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols on the lever itself)Position of the selector for manual gear changing.
Move the selector to position M.
→ Push the selector towards the "+ " sign to change up a gear.
Pull the selector towards the "-" sign to change down a gear.
- If the vehicle stops or reduces speed (for example when approaching a stop sign), the gearbox changes down automatically to first gear.
- In sequential mode, it is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes.
- A request to change gear is accepted only if the engine speed permits it.
- The SPORT and SNOW modes do not operate in sequential mode.
DRIVING
SPORT and SNOW programmes
These two special programmes supplement the automatic operation in very particular conditions of use.
SNOW programme " \* "
With the lever in position D and the engine running, press button B. The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery roads.
This programme makes moving off easier and improves traction in conditions of poor grip.
* appears on the instrument panel.
Return to automatic operation
At any time, press the button selected again to exit from the programme engaged and return to auto-adaptive mode.
- a marked snatching may be felt when selecting R for reverse gear,
- if an operating fault occurs, the gearbox is locked in a gear, do not exceed a speed of 60 mph (approx. 100 km/h).
- do not switch off your engine if the gear selector is in position D or R.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
SPORT programme "S"
With the lever in position D and the engine running, press button A.
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic driving style.
S appears on the instrument panel.
DRIVING
FIXED CENTRED CONTROLS STEERING WHE
| 1 | Rotation | -Scrolling of the various pages of information on the instrument panel display.-Movement through the various menus on the instrument panel display.-Increasing/decreasing of the values. |
| Short press | -Opening of the menu on the instrument panel display (only when stationary).-Selection and confirmation of the information. | |
| Long press Trip computer zero reset (if the trip computer page is displayed). | ||
| 2 | Short press | -Cancellation of the current operation.-Return to the previous screen on the instrument panel display. |
| Long press Return to the initial screen on the instrument panel display. | ||
| 3 | Short press Increasing of the speed in steps of 1 km/h (1 mph)/storing of the speed. | |
| Maintained press Increasing of the speed in steps of 5 km/h (5 mph). | ||
| 4 | Short press Decreasing of the speed in steps of 1 km/h (1 mph)/storing of the speed. | |
| Maintained press Decreasing of the speed in steps 5 km/h (5 mph). | ||
| 5 | Short press | Suspension or resumption of the cruise control/speed limiter (depending on the mode selected). |
| 6 | Short press | Selection of the cruise control or speed limiter mode (the cycle on this button will always begin with selection of the speed limiter). |
| 7 | Short press | Deactivation of the cruise control/speed limiter. |
| 8 | Short press | -Pick up an incoming call.-Hang up the current call.-Opening of the telephone short-cut menu.-Confir rmation on the list and the telephone menu. |
| Long press Refuse an incoming call. | ||
| 9 | Short press/Long press Horn. | |
| 10 | Short press | Activation/deactivation of the Black Panel mode (night driving). |
| 11 | Short press Activation of the voice command. | |
| Long press Navigation instruction repeat. | ||
DRIVING
| 12 | Rotation | - Radio source: Scrolling of the pre-set stations.- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Scrolling of the CDs or directories.- On the multifunction display menus: Movement and increasing/decreasing. |
| Short press | - On the multifunction display menus: confirmation.- Opening of the short-cut menus (in accordance with the multifunction display page). | |
| Long press Opening of the multifunction display main menu. | ||
| 13 | Short press | Cancellation of the current operation and return to the previous screen on the multifunction display.When an incoming telephone call is received: Refuse the call. |
| Long press Return to the initial screen on the multifunction display. | ||
| 14 | Short press | Access to the multifunction display general menu. |
| 15 | Short press/Maintained press Volume increase. | |
| 16 | Short press/Maintained press Volume decrease. | |
| 17 | Short press | - First press: mute.- Second press: restoring of the sound. |
| 18 | Short press | - Radio source: Automatic search of higher frequencies.- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the next track. |
| Maintained press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast forward play. | ||
| 19 | Short press | - Radio source: Automatic search of lower frequencies.- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the previous track. |
| Maintained press CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Rewind. | ||
| 20 | Short press | - Radio source: displaying of the list of radio stations available.- CD/MP3 CD and CD changer source: displaying of the list of CD tracks and directories.- Jukebox source: displaying of the list of albums. |
| Long press Updating of the list of radio stations. | ||
| 21 | Short press/Long press Horn. | |
| 22 | Short press | MODE: selection of the type of information presented on the multifunction display. |
DRIVING
SPEED LIMIT
System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.
When the limit speed is reached, the accelerator pedal no longer has any effect.
The speed limiter is switched on manually: a speed of at least 20 mph (approx. 30 km/h) must be programmed.
The speed limiter can in no way replace respect for speed limits or vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.
Steering wheel controls
The speed limiter switches are located on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Displays on the instrument panel
The speed limiter information is displayed in zone A of the instrument panel.
Successive presses will modify the cruise speed in steps of 1 mph and a continuous press in steps of 5 mph.
Programming
Press on button 4 to select speed limiter mode "LIMIT".
The selection is confirmed by the display of the function in zone A of the instrument panel.
When the function is selected, the last memorised speed and the information "PAUSE" are displayed. With the engine running, you can adjust the memorised maximum speed, displayed in zone A, by pressing on:
Button 1 to increase the memorised maximum speed.
√ Button 2 to decrease the memorised maximum speed.
Activation
Press on button 3 when the desired maximum speed is displayed. The information "ON" then appears in zone A.
DRIVING
Suspension/Resumption
Press on button 3.
This action causes the information "PAUSE" to appear in zone A of the instrument panel.
This action does not cancel the memorised maximum speed which remains displayed in zone A of the instrument panel.
Overriding the programmed speed
The accelerator pedal has an end-of-travel switch. In order to exceed the memorised maximum speed at any time, you can press the pedal all the way down. While the speed is being exceeded, the speed displayed in zone A will flash. You have only to release the accelerator pedal to return below the maximum speed, to restore the function.
The speed will also flash if the speed limiter is not able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed (e.g. on a steep descent or under excessive acceleration).
To reactivate the speed limiter, release the accelerator to slow to a speed lower than the programmed speed.
Return to normal driving
Press on button 5.
Select the speed limiter function.
Or stop the engine.
Operating fault
If there is a malfunction, a message is displayed accompanied by a sound signal and lighting of the SERVICE warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
In the event of a steep descent or under excessive acceleration, the speed limiter (which does not act on the brakes) may not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.
Use of a floor mat other than that recommended by CITROËN may affect the normal operation of the accelerator pedal and hamper the operation of the speed limiter.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN are fitted with a 3rd fi xing located in the pedal area to avoid any risk of interference with the pedals.
DRIVING
CRUISE CONTR
System which automatically maintains the vehicle speed programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually: the vehicle speed must be at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and you must engage at least:
- 4th gear for manual gearboxes,
- 2nd gear for automatic gearboxes.
Displays on the instrument panel
The programmed information is grouped together in zone A of the instrument panel.
Steering wheel switches
The cruise control switches are located on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Programming
Press button 4 to select cruise control mode "CRUISE".
The selection is confirmed by the display of the function in zone A of the instrument panel.
When the function is selected, no cruising speed has yet been memorised.
Once the desired speed has been reached using the accelerator, press button 1 or button 2. The cruising speed is then memorised and cruise control is activated. The cruising speed is displayed in zone A of the instrument panel, and "ON" is displayed.
You can then release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will automatically keep to the speed chosen.
The vehicle speed may vary slightly from that memorised.
If during cruise control the system cannot keep to the cruise speed (e.g. on a steep descent), then the speed flakes. If necessary, brake to curb your speed.
Adjustment of the memorised speed while cruise control is in operation
You can adjust the memorised speed, displayed in zone A, by pressing:
- Button 1 to increase the speed. - Button 2 to reduce the speed.
Successive presses will modify the cruise speed in steps of 1 mph and a continuous press in steps of 5 mph.
DRIVING
Overriding the programmed speed
While cruise control is in operation, it is always possible to go above the programmed speed simply by pressing the accelerator pedal (for example to overtake another vehicle).
The speed displayed in zone A fl ashes.
You only have to release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed.
Suspension/Resumption
Either by pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal.
Or by pressing button 3.
Or by the ESP or ASR systems being active.
For vehicles with a manual gearbox, cruise control is deactivated if the gear lever is in neutral.
"PAUSE" will be displayed in zone A of the instrument panel.
These actions do not cancel the cruising speed which remains displayed on the instrument panel.
Reactivation
- By recalling the memorised speed
After deactivation, press button 3. Your vehicle automatically returns to the memorised cruising speed. The memorised speed and "ON" are displayed in zone A.
If the memorised cruising speed is higher than the current speed, the vehicle will accelerate strongly to reach the current speed.
- By selecting the current speed
Press button 1 or 2 once the desired speed has been reached.
The new speed and "ON" will appear in zone A.
Return to normal driving
Press on button 5.
Select the cruise control function.
Or stop the engine.
The speed that was chosen is no longer memorised.
Operating fault
If there is a malfunction, a message is displayed accompanied by a sound signal and lighting of the SERVICE warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Cruise control must only be used where the traffic conditions permit driving at a constant speed.
Do not use it on congested roads or when the weather or the road conditions are poor.
The driver still has to remain attentive and in complete control of his vehicle.
You are recommended to keep your feet within range of the pedals.
DRIVING
LANE DEPARTU WARNING SYSTEM
System which detects the involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on the ground (continuous or discontinuous line).
Sensors, fitted below the front bumper, trigger a warning if the vehicle drifts (speed higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).
This system operates to its full potential above all when used on motorways and main roads.
The lane departure warning system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.
Activation
Press button A, the indicator light comes on.
Deactivation
Press button A again, the indicator light switches off.
The status of the system remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.
Detection
You are warned by the vibration of the driver's seat cushion:
- on the right-hand side, if the marking on the ground has been crossed on the right,
- on the left-hand side, if the marking on the ground has been crossed on the left.
No warning is transmitted while the direction indicator is active and for approximately 20 seconds after the direction indicator is switched off.
A warning may be transmitted if a direction marking (e.g. arrow) or non-standard marking (e.g. graffi ti) is crossed.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction, the service warning light comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction display. Consult a CITROËN dealer.
The detection may be disrupted:
- if the sensors are dirty (mud, snow...),
- if the markings on the ground are worn,
- if there is little contrast between the markings on the ground and the road surface.
DRIVING
PARKING SPACE SENS
natural_image
Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a yellow traffic sign lane (no text or symbols visible)System which measures the parking space available between two vehicles or obstacles. It measures the size of the space and gives you information on:
- the possibility of fitting into a free space, depending on the dimensions of your vehicle and the distances necessary for your manoeuvring,
- the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to be performed.
The system does not measure spaces which are clearly much smaller or larger than the size of the vehicle.
Displays on the instrument panel
The parking space sensor function warning lamp can have three different statuses:
- off: the function is not selected,
- on fi xed: the function is selected but the conditions for measuring are not yet met (direction indicator not operating, speed too high) or the measuring phase is terminated.
- flashing: the measuring is in progress or the message is being displayed.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the steering wheel and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)You can select the "parking space sensor" function by pressing button A. The fixed lighting of the warning lamp indicates that the function is selected.
During the measurement, the message "Measurement in progress - Vmax 20 km/h (12 mph)" is displayed on the instrument panel screen.
DRIVING
Operation
You have identified a parking space:
Press button A to select the function.
Activate the direction indicator on the side where the space is to be measured.
During the measuring, go forward the length of the space, at a speed less than 12 mph (approx. 20 km/h), to prepare for your manoeuvre.
The system then measures the size of the space.
The system informs you of the level of diffi culty of the manoeuvre via a message on the instrument panel display accompanied by a gong.
Depending on the message is-
sued by the system, you may or
may not be able to perform the
manoeuvre.
The function displays the following types of message:
Parking YES
Parking diffi cult
Parking NO
The function deselects itself automatically:
- when you engage reverse gear,
- when you switch off the ignition,
- if measuring is not requested,
- within five minutes of selection of the function,
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold of 45 mph (approx. 70 km/h) for one minute.
If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the parking space is too large, the system may not be able the measure the space.
The function remains available after each measurement and thus can measure more than one space during your search.
In bad weather conditions or in winter, make sure that the sensors are not covered by dirt, or by ice or snow.
The parking space sensor function deactivates the front parking assistance during the space measuring phase when you are in forward gear.
If there is a malfunction, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer.
DRIVING
VISUAL AND AUDIE FRONT AND/OR REAR PARKING ASSISTANCE
System consisting of proximity sensors, installed in the front and/or rear bumper.
It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, barrier...) located behind the vehicle, however, it will not be able to detect obstacles located immediately below the bumper.
An object, such as a stake, a road-works cone or any other similar object may be detected at the start of the manoeuvre but may no longer be detected when the vehicle moves nearer to it.
The parking assistance is switched on :
- by engaging reverse gear, - at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible signal and/or displaying of the vehicle on the multifunction display.
The proximity information is indicated by:
- an audible signal which becomes more rapid as the vehicle approaches the obstacle,
- a diagram on the multifunction display, with blocks which move closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to the emission of the audible signal by the speakers; front or rear and right or left.
When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than approximately twenty-five centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol appears, depending on the multifunction display version.
The parking assistance is switched off :
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been stationary for more than three seconds in forward gear.
The parking assistance system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.
Deactivation
Press button A, the warning light comes on, the system is fully deactivated.
The system will be deactivated automatically when a trailer is being towed or when a bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle carrier recommended by CITROËN).
DRIVING
Reactivation
Press button A again, the warning light switches off, the system is reactivated.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
"HYDRACTIVE ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION
The suspension automatically and instantly adjusts to different driving styles and to the profile of the road, providing the best compromise between occupant comfort and vehicle road holding.
It allows you to alternate between soft and firm suspension settings, maximising comfort at the same time as permanently guaranteeing the highest level of safety. It also automatically corrects road holding, according to the vehicle load and driving conditions.
Also, the "Hydractive III+" suspension gives you the possibility of choosing between two modes of suspension.
A change of suspension mode can be made either when the vehicle is moving or when stationary, by pressing on button A.
Display on the instrument panel
The suspension mode selected is displayed on the instrument panel display.
Normal mode
This mode favours soft damping for maximum comfort.
If the speed authorised for a particular position is exceeded, the vehicle reverts automatically to the normal road position.
SPORT mode
This mode favours dynamic driving.
The warning lamp on button A comes on in addition to the message on the instrument panel display.
SPORT mode is retained when you switch off the engine.
DRIVING
Reactivation
Press button A again, the warning light switches off, the system is reactivated.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
"HYDRACTIVE ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION
The suspension automatically and instantly adjusts to different driving styles and to the profile of the road, providing the best compromise between occupant comfort and vehicle road holding.
It allows you to alternate between soft and firm suspension settings, maximising comfort at the same time as permanently guaranteeing the highest level of safety. It also automatically corrects road holding, according to the vehicle load and driving conditions.
Also, the "Hydractive III+" suspension gives you the possibility of choosing between two modes of suspension.
A change of suspension mode can be made either when the vehicle is moving or when stationary, by pressing on button A.
Display on the instrument panel
The suspension mode selected is displayed on the instrument panel display.
Normal mode
This mode favours soft damping for maximum comfort.
If the speed authorised for a particular position is exceeded, the vehicle reverts automatically to the normal road position.
SPORT mode
This mode favours dynamic driving.
The warning lamp on button A comes on in addition to the message on the instrument panel display.
SPORT mode is retained when you switch off the engine.
DRIVING
Vehicle positions
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control buttons and directional arrows (no readable text or symbols)Position changes may only be made when the engine is running.
Adjustable ground clearance responds to all types of situation. Apart from a few specific situations, driving in the normal road position is imperative.
Press once on one of the adjustment controls.
The change in position is indicated by a message on the instrument panel display.
Maximum height
Changing a wheel (Not possible if speed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Intermediate position
For an increased ground clearance (Not possible if speed > 25 mph (40 km/h)).
For use on diffi cult roads when travelling at reduced speed, as well as on car park ramps.
Normal position
If the speed authorised for a particular position is exceeded, the vehicle reverts automatically to the normal position.
Minimum height
To facilitate loading or unloading the vehicle.
For workshop inspections.
Not to be used in normal driving (Not possible if speed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).
DRIVING
Position not authorised
The instrument panel display temporarily displays a message indicating that this position is not authorised.
The vehicle remains in the authorised position and the instrument panel display indicates this position to you.
Automatic variation of ground clearance
- If your speed exceeds 70 mph (approx. 110 km/h), on a good road surface, ground clearance is lowered. The vehicle returns to its normal position if the road surface deteriorates or if your speed is lower than 55 mph (approx. 90 km/h).
- At low or medium speed, if the road surface is poor, ground clearance is increased. The vehicle returns to its normal position as soon as conditions allow.
- On switching off the ignition, the ground clearance is reduced to the parking position
For your safety if you are operating underneath the vehicle, it is obligatory to support the vehicle with axle stands.
CHECKS
BOI
Protects the components of the engine and provides access for checking levels.
Opening
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)Open the driver's door.
Pull the interior control A, located at the bottom of the door frame.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front grille with a yellow arrow and letter B marking (no readable text or symbols)Lift the lever B and raise the bonnet.
natural_image
Interior view of a car engine bay with labeled components (no text or symbols visible)Unclip the strut C from its housing and pivot it to insert it in the notch D indicated by a yellow arrow.
Fix the strut in the notch to hold the bonnet open.
To avoid any risk of burns, only handle the bonnet strut by its yellow end.
The location of the interior control prevents opening of the bonnet while the driver's door is closed.
This operation must only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary.
Avoid opening the bonnet in strong winds.
Closing
Take the strut out of the support notch.
Clip the strut in its housing.
Lower the bonnet then slam it firmly at the end of its travel.
Pull on the bonnet to check that it is secured correctly.
CHECKS
DRAINING THE DIESEL F FILTER
Protective cover
Removal of the cover
HDi 138 engine
Remove the protective cover by first unclipping at 3, then 1 and 4.
Unclip at 2 by pulling towards you, then lift up.
HDi 110, HDi 173 and V6 HDi 208 engines
F Pull the protective cover upwards to remove it.
Refi tting
Firstly clip in at 2.
Lower and centre the cover.
Clip in at 3 and 4, pushing vertically and gently from the rear.
Clip in at 1 pushing vertically.
Draining water from the fuel filter
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with hoses and a yellow arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)Drain regularly (at each oil change). To drain the water, slacken the bleed screw or the water in diesel fuel sensor, located at the base of the filter.
Continue until all the water has flowed out.
Then retighten the bleed screw or the water detection sensor.
CHECKS
RUNNING OUT OF FUEI (DIESEL)
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing downward (no visible text or symbols)HDi 110 engine
- Unclip the protective cover to gain access to the priming pump.
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with hoses and a yellow arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)HDi 138 and HDi 173 engines
Unclip the protective cover to gain access to the priming pump.
Priming the fuel circuit
In the event of running out of fuel:
after filling (minimum 5 litres) and removing the protective cover, action the manual priming pump, until some resistance is felt,
^F operate the starter motor while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly until the engine starts.
If the engine fails to start at the first attempt, wait fifteen seconds before trying again.
If the engine fails to start after a few attempts, action the priming pump again and then try to start the engine.
When the engine is idling, accelerate slightly to complete the bleeding of the circuit.
V6 HDi 208 engine with electric pump
In the event of running out of fuel:
after adding fuel, turn the ignition key to position M, wait for a few seconds,
^2 operate the starter motor until the engine starts.
If the engine fails to start after several attempts, contact a CITROËN dealer.
HDi engines are the result of advanced technology.
Any intervention requires special qualifications which only a CITROËN dealer can guarantee.
CHECKS
1.8i 16V
2.0i 16V
PETROL EN
They allow you access for checking the level of the various fl uids and for replacing certain components.
- Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
- Power steering fluid reservoir or power steering and suspension fluid reservoir.
- Coolant reservoir.
- Dipstick.
- Engine oil fi ller cap.
- Brake fluid reservoir.
- Battery.
- Air fi Iter.
Vehicles fitted with the 2.0i 16V engine may be fitted with metal suspension. In
this case, a different power steering fluid reservoir is fitted.
CHECKS
3.0i V6
3 litre V6 petrol engine
- Screen wash and headlamp wash reservoir.
- Power steering and suspension fluid reservoir.
- Engine coolant reservoir.
- Engine oil gauge.
- Engine oil topping-up.
- Brake fluid reservoir.
- Battery.
- Air filter.
CHECKS
HDi 110
HDi 138
DIESEL EN
They allow you access for checking the level of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for repriming the fuel.
- Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
- Power steering fl uid reservoir or power steering and suspension fl uid reservoir, depending on equipment.
- Coolant reservoir.
- Dipstick.
- Engine oil fi ller cap.
- Air fi Iter.
- Brake fluid reservoir.
- Battery.
As the diesel circuit is pressurised, any work on this circuit is prohibited.
Vehicles fitted with the HDi 138 engine may be fitted with metal suspension. In this case, a different power steering fluid reservoir is fitted.
CHECKS
HDi 173
V6 HDi 208
HDi 173 - V6 HDi 208 engines (with particle filter)
- Screen wash and headlamp wash reservoir.
- Power steering and suspension fluid reservoir.
- Engine coolant reservoir.
- Engine oil gauge.
- Engine oil topping-up.
- Air fi Iter.
- Brake fluid reservoir.
- Battery.
- "+" and "-" terminals for starting with an assisting battery.
The diesel fuel circuit being under high pressure:
- Any intervention on the circuit is prohibited.
- HDi engines are the result of advanced technology.
Any intervention requires special qualifications which only a CITROËN dealer can guarantee.
CHECKS
CHEC
Check all of these levels regularly and top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops signifi cantly, have the corresponding circuit checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Oil level
The reading will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 15 minutes.
The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator on the instrument panel, or using the dipstick.
Between two oil changes, the consumption should not exceed 0.5 litre per 600 miles (1,000 km).
Check this level also between each scheduled service and before long journeys.
natural_image
Illustration of a mechanical screw with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols on the object itself)Dipstick
There are 2 marks on the dipstick:
- A = max; never exceed this level,
- B = min; top up the level via the oil fi ller cap, using the type of oil suited to your engine.
Draining the engine
Refer to the Maintenance and Warranty Guide for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system,
the use of additives in the engine oil is prohibited.
Brake fluid level
The brake fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the brake pad wear.
Draining the circuit
Refer to the Maintenance and Warranty Guide for details of the interval for this operation.
This fluid must be changed regularly. Fluid which has been used excessively may cause a loss of braking efficiency.
Fluid specification
The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and fulfi I the DOT4 standards.
Power steering fluid or power steering and suspension fluid level
This fluid must be topped up by a CITROËN dealer.
Oil specifi cation
The oil must correspond to your engine and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
CHECKS
Coolant level
The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it.
When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan. This can operate with the ignition off.
On vehicles which are fitted with a particle emission filter, the fan may operate after the vehicle has been switched off, even if the engine is cold.
In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.
Draining the circuit
The coolant does not have to be changed.
Fluid specifi cation
The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, the minimum level of this fluid is indicated by an audible signal
and a message on the multifunction display.
Top up the level when you stop the vehicle.
Fluid specifi cation
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fluid must not be topped up or replaced with water.
Reservoir capacities:
- screenwash: approximately 3.5 litres,
- screenwash and headlamp wash: approximately 6.15 litres.
Diesel additive level (Diesel engine with particle emission filter)
A low additive level is indicated by lighting of the service warning light, accompanied by an audible warning and a message on the multifunction display.
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a CITROËN dealer without delay.
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground.
Empty used oil into the containers provided for this purpose in the CITROËN network.
CHECKS
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the Maintenance and Warranty Guide and in relation to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Battery
The battery does not require any maintenance. However, check that the terminals are clean and correctly tightened, particularly in summer and winter.
When carrying out work on the battery, refer to the "Practical information" section for details of the precautions to be taken before disconnecting the battery and following its reconnection.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Refer to the Maintenance and Warranty Guide for details of the replacement intervals for these components.
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often if necessary (refer to the "Engines" paragraph).
A clogged passenger compartment filter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours.
Oil filter
Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed.
Refer to the Maintenance and Warranty Guide for details of the replacement interval for this component.
Particulate filter system (Diesel)
Complementary to the catalytic converter, this filter makes an active contribution to the preservation of air quality by the retaining of the unburnt pollutant particles. Black exhaust fumes are thus no longer emitted.
After prolonged idling or driving at very low speeds, you may occasionally notice water vapour being emitted from the exhaust when accelerating. This is of no consequence to the running of the vehicle or to the environment.
If there is risk of clogging, a message appears on the instrument panel display, accompanied by a sound signal and lighting of the service warning lamp.
This alert tells you that the particle fi Iter is starting to fi ll up (in conditions of urban driving of exceptionally long duration: low speeds, traffi c jams etc.).
To regenerate the filter, it is advised to drive as soon as possible, when traffic conditions permit, at a speed of 40 mph (around 60 km/h) or more for at least five minutes (until the alert message disappears).
If this alert persists, consult a CITROËN dealer.
CHECKS
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the Maintenance and Warranty Guide for the details of the checking interval for this component.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the Maintenance and Warranty Guide for details of the checking interval for this component.
Brake disc wear status
For information relating to checking the brake disc wear status, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Handbrake
If the handbrake travel is too long or if a loss of effectiveness of this system is noticed, the handbrake must be adjusted, even between two services.
This system must be checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Only use products recommended by CITROËN or products of equivalent quality and specifications.
In order to optimise the operation of units as important as the braking system, CITROËN selects and offers very specific products.
To avoid damaging the electrical units, the use of a high pressure washer in the engine compartment is strictly prohibited.
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be
necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
PUNCTURE REPAIR
Complete system consisting of a compressor and a bottle of filling product which permits temporary repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.
natural_image
Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)The puncture repair kit is located in the boot under the floor.
This repair kit is available from CITROËN dealers.
It is designed to repair holes of a maximum diameter of 6 mm, located exclusively on the tyre tread or shoulder. Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated the tyre.
Using the kit
Switch off the ignition.
Affi x the speed limitation sticker to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Check that the switch A is tilted to position "0".
Connect the pipe of the bottle 1 to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.
Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.
natural_image
Electric heating device with attached cable and connector (no visible text or symbols)
natural_image
Illustration of a car tire and battery charger with a close-up of a control panel labeled A (no text or symbols on the main components)
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a plug inserted into a sink with a yellow directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Switch on the compressor by tilting the switch A to position "1" until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
natural_image
Close-up of a black plastic electronic component with circular ports and a highlighted yellow button labeled 'A', showing no visible text or symbols.If this pressure has not been reached after approximately five to ten minutes, the tyre cannot be repaired; contact a CITROËN dealer to have your vehicle repaired.
Remove the compressor and unclip and store the bottle in a sealed bag to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid.
Drive immediately for approximately two miles (three kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and 35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to fill the puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the pressure.
Connect the compressor pipe directly to the valve of the repaired wheel.
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel connected to a battery and charging station with yellow arrows indicating components (no text or symbols visible)PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket again.
Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a plug inserted into a charging slot, with a yellow directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to infl ate: switch A in position "1"; to defl ate: switch A in position "0" and press button B), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the door aperture on the driver's side), then remember to check that the leak is fli led correctly (no further loss of pressure after several miles [kilometres]).
Remove the compressor, then store the whole kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h] max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 120 miles (200 km).
Visit a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible to have the tyre repaired or replaced by a technician.
natural_image
3D rendered mechanical component with circular ports and a highlighted section showing two yellow buttons labeled A and B (no text or symbols on the main subject)Take care, the bottle of puncture repair fluid contains ethylene-glycol. This
product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep it out of reach of children.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the base of the bottle.
The bottle is designed for a single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the bottle into the environment, take it to a CITROËN dealer or to an organisation responsible for its collection.
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of fi lling product, available from CITROËN dealers.
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-inflation detection, the tyre under-inflation warning light will remain on after the wheel has been repaired until the system is reinitialised by a CITROEN dealer.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
CHANGING A
Access to the tools
natural_image
Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical device showing internal components (no text or symbols)The tools are to be found in a protective holder inside the spare wheel.
Pull back the retaining strap to have access.
List of tools
- Handle
- Jack
-
Tool for the removal/refitting of bolt protectors
-
Centring guide
- Towing eye
- Moveable chock (depending on equipment)
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Access to the spare wheel
natural_image
Close-up of a car's wheel rim and side panel with a yellow arrow pointing to the handle (no visible text or symbols)To remove the spare wheel
Lift up the boot floor using the strap (Saloon) or the retractable handle (Tourer).
Fold back the boot carpet (Saloon).
Attach the hook to the upper section of the boot (in the middle of the boot pillar).
Detach the strap then push the wheel forwards so as to be able to lift it.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the hood, vent, and engine compartment (no visible text or symbols)To reposition the spare wheel
Position the spare wheel flat in the boot, then pull it towards you.
^c Next place the toolbox inside the wheel, then secure the assembly with the belt.
Release the strap to return the boot floor to its initial position.
The tyre pressure is indicated on the label located on the left-hand door centre pillar. On this label, the pressures are specified, according to the vehicle load.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Removing a wheel
natural_image
Side view of a silver sedan car against black background, with red camera and warning symbols on the left (no text or labels on vehicle)Park the vehicle on stable, firm ground that is not slippery. apply the parking brake.
If your vehicle is equipped with "Hydractive III+" suspension, with the engine running at idle, adjust the ground clearance to its maximum height.
Switch off the ignition and engage first gear or reverse gear depending on any slope (for a vehicle with automatic gearbox, select position P).
If your vehicle is fitted with "Hydractive III+" suspension, position the chock, whichever direction the gradient may be in, in front of the front wheel diametrically opposite to the one to be replaced.
natural_image
Side view of a silver sedan with two yellow directional arrows indicating vehicle movement or positioning (no text or symbols present)Position the jack at one of the four jacking-points provided on the subframe close to the wheels, then use the handle to unwind the jack until it reaches the ground.
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel rim with a yellow plastic clip attached, no visible text or symbolsRemove the protector from each bolt using tool 3.
Slacken the wheel bolts.
Continue to extend the jack until the wheel is a few centimetres off the ground.
^2 Undo the bolts, remove the wheel.
Before positioning the jack:
Always adjust the vehicle's ground clearance to the "maximum height" position and retain this adjustment for as long as the jack is under the vehicle (do not use the hydraulic adjustments),
Immobilise your vehicle on horizontal, stable and non-slippery ground,
Ensure that any passengers have left the vehicle and are in a safe place.
Never get underneath the vehicle if it is supported only by the jack.
The jack and all of the tools are specific to your vehicle. Do not use them for any other applications.
Have the original wheel repaired and refitted as soon as possible.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Wheel for temporary use
natural_image
Technical illustration of a mechanical connector with threaded shaft and threaded end (no text or symbols)Your vehicle may be fitted with a spare wheel which is different to those on the vehicle. When fitting the spare wheel, it is normal to notice that the wheel bolt washers do not come into contact with the wheel rim. The spare wheel is secured by the conical tapering of the wheel bolt's shaft.
When refitting the original wheel, ensure that the wheel bolt contact surfaces are clean and in good condition.
Fitting a wheel
Fit the wheel on the hub, using the centring guide. Make sure that the contact surface between the hub and the wheel is clean.
Screw in the bolts but do not fully tighten them.
Lower the jack and remove it.
Tighten the wheel bolts, using the wheelbrace.
Refi t the protectors on the bolts.
Return the ground clearance to the normal position.
Ensure the tyre pressure is correct and have the balancing checked.
Deflation detection
Such wheels have tyre pressure sensors. It is essential to have repairs carried out by a CITROËN dealer.
Anti-theft bolts
Each wheel is equipped with one anti-theft bolt.
To remove it:
Remove the protector using tool 3.
Use the anti-theft socket with the handle.
If your vehicle is fitted with a spare wheel of a different size to those on the vehicle, you must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) whilst using the spare wheel.
The wheel bolts are specific to the type of wheel.
If the type of wheel is changed, check with your CITROËN dealer that the wheel bolts are compatible with the new wheels.
Take care to note down the code number engraved on the head of the anti-theft bolt socket. This will enable you to obtain replacement anti-theft bolt sockets from a dealership.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Wheel for temporary use
natural_image
Technical illustration of a mechanical connector with threaded shaft and threaded end (no text or symbols)Your vehicle may be fitted with a spare wheel which is different to those on the vehicle. When fitting the spare wheel, it is normal to notice that the wheel bolt washers do not come into contact with the wheel rim. The spare wheel is secured by the conical tapering of the wheel bolt's shaft.
When refitting the original wheel, ensure that the wheel bolt contact surfaces are clean and in good condition.
Fitting a wheel
Fit the wheel on the hub, using the centring guide. Make sure that the contact surface between the hub and the wheel is clean.
Screw in the bolts but do not fully tighten them.
Lower the jack and remove it.
Tighten the wheel bolts, using the wheelbrace.
Refi t the protectors on the bolts.
Return the ground clearance to the normal position.
Ensure the tyre pressure is correct and have the balancing checked.
Deflation detection
Such wheels have tyre pressure sensors. It is essential to have repairs carried out by a CITROËN dealer.
Anti-theft bolts
Each wheel is equipped with one anti-theft bolt.
To remove it:
Remove the protector using tool 3.
Use the anti-theft socket with the handle.
If your vehicle is fitted with a spare wheel of a different size to those on the vehicle, you must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) whilst using the spare wheel.
The wheel bolts are specific to the type of wheel.
If the type of wheel is changed, check with your CITROËN dealer that the wheel bolts are compatible with the new wheels.
Take care to note down the code number engraved on the head of the anti-theft bolt socket. This will enable you to obtain replacement anti-theft bolt sockets from a dealership.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
CHAN
Operating procedure for replacing a faulty bulb with a new bulb without the use of any tools.
Headlamps
Model with Xenon headlamps (D1S)
Changing sidelamps
Lift up the pegs A to remove the cover on the headlamp.
Remove the protective cap B.
Pull the bulb holder to remove it.
^6 Replace the bulb and replace the bulb holder.
natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle headgear assembly with labeled component B (no text or symbols beyond label)Replace the protective cap B.
Replace the cover and fix it in place using the pegs A.
- Sidelamps: W 5 W
- Dual-function Xenon headlamps (dipped/main): D1S
- Angular lighting: HP19
- Daytime-running lamps: HP24
For the maintenance of the front headlamp unit and the changing of HP19, D1S and HP21 bulbs, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs must be replaced by a CITROËN dealer.
You are advised to change the D1S bulbs at the same time, if one of them has failed.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Model with halogen headlamps
- Main beams: H1
- Sidelamps: W 5 W
- Dipped beams: H7
- Directional lighting: H7
- Daytime-running lamps: HP24
For the maintenance of the front headlamp unit and the changing of HP24 bulbs, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Changing main beams Changing sidelamps
Lift up the pegs A to remove the cover on the headlamp.
Remove the protective cap B.
Disengage the retaining spring.
Remove the bulb and replace it, paying attention to the direction of fi tting.
Replace the retaining spring.
Replace the protective cap B.
^2 Replace the cover and fix it in place using the pegs A.
natural_image
Mechanical component with labeled part B, showing internal components without any readable text or symbolsLift up the pegs A to remove the cover on the headlamp.
Remove the protective cap B.
Pull the bulb holder to remove it.
Replace the bulb and replace the bulb holder.
Replace the protective cap B.
Replace the cover and fix it in place using the pegs A.
Halogen bulbs must not be changed until they have been off for a few minutes (risk of serious burns).
Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. It is essential that only anti-U.V. type bulbs are used in order not to damage the headlamp.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing dipped beams
natural_image
Mechanical component with labeled parts, no visible text or symbolsLift up the pegs A to remove the cover on the headlamp.
Remove the protective cap C.
Disconnect the connector by pressing it between the thumb and index finger.
Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.
Take out the bulb.
Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial force.
Reconnect the connector, until it is all the way in.
Replace the protective cap C.
Replace the cover and fix it in place using the pegs A.
Changing the directional lighting
natural_image
Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled point D (no readable text or symbols)Lift up the pegs A to remove the cover on the headlamp.
Remove the protective cap D.
Disconnect the connector by pressing it between the thumb and index finger.
Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.
Take out the bulb.
Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial force.
Reconnect the connector, until it is all the way in.
Replace the protective cap D.
Replace the cover and fix it in place using the pegs A.
Changing direction indicators
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front bumper with a yellow circular badge labeled 'A' (no visible text or symbols beyond the label)Remove the fixing screw of cover A using a torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.
Remove the fixing screw of lamp B using a torx tool and pull the headlamp unit to remove it from the bumper.
^c Detach the bulb C by pressing on bars 1 and 2.
Disconnect the connector (pull whilst pressing on the grey tongue using a fl at screwdriver).
Replace the bulb.
Connect the connector (push the grey tongue in well).
Replace the headlamp unit in the bumper.
Screw the headlamp unit in.
Position the cover using its guides and screw in.
Bulbs: HP24 W
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing front foglamps
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front dashboard and side panel showing a yellow 'B' badge (no text or symbols visible)Remove the fixing screw of cover A using a torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.
Remove the fixing screw of lamp B using a torx tool and pull the headlamp unit to remove it from the bumper.
natural_image
Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with labeled parts (D, C, 1, 2), no readable text or symbols beyond labels.Disconnect the connector D.
Remove the bulb by performing a quarter of a turn.
Replace the bulb.
Connect the connector D.
Replace the headlamp unit in the bumper.
Screw the headlamp unit in.
Position the cover using its guides and screw in.
Bulbs: H8
Changing side repeaters
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side mirror with a yellow arrow pointing to the front wheel (no text or symbols visible)The side repeater is sealed. If the bulb is faulty, replace the side repeater.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
When refi tting, take care not to trap the electrical cables.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Rear lamps (Saloon)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Stop-lamps and sidelamps: P21 W/5 W
2. Sidelamps: R 5 W
3. Reversing lamp: H21 W
4. Foglamps: H21 W
5. Direction indicators: P21 W
Changing the lamps on the boot
Open the boot.
Using a fl at screwdriver, remove the 3 clips which fix the trim in the lamp area.
Partially remove the trim F.
Disconnect the connector G.
natural_image
3D cutaway view of a mechanical device showing internal components and housing (no text or symbols)Detach the bulb holder H.
Replace the bulb.
Replace the bulb holder H.
Connect the connector G.
Replace and fix the trim F with its clips.
In some climatic conditions, mist may appear on the headlamp/indicator lenses.
This is normal and will disappear (e.g. after the lamps have been on for a few minutes).
If it does not, contact a CITROËN dealer.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing the lamps on the wing
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a yellow arrow pointing to a component labeled 'A' (no text or symbols beyond the label)
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front compartment showing a plastic door and a yellow arrow pointing to the door (no text or symbols visible)Remove the lateral boot trim flap A. To do so, pull it towards the inside of the boot, then pull it upwards.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's rear window with a red arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)Disconnect connector B.
Unscrew the 2 fixings C
Remove the lamp from its housing.
natural_image
Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical device showing internal components and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)Detach the bulb holder D.
Replace the bulb.
Replace the bulb holder D.
Place the lamp in its housing.
Screw in the 2 fixings C.
Connect connector B.
Refit the trim A.
You can use the spare wheel jack handle to screw or unscrew the fixings C.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Rear lamps (Tourer)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Stop-lamps and sidelamps: P21 W/5 W
2. Sidelamps: R 5 W
3. Reversing lamp: H21 W
4. Foglamps: H21 W
5. Direction indicators: P21 W
Changing the lamps on the boot
Open the boot.
Using a fl at screwdriver, remove the 3 clips which fix the trim in the lamp area.
Partially remove the trim F.
Disconnect the connector G.
natural_image
Cutaway view of a mechanical device showing internal components and housing (no text or symbols visible)Detach the bulb holder H.
Replace the bulb.
Replace the bulb holder H.
Connect the connector G.
Replace and fix the trim F with its clips.
In some climatic conditions, mist may appear on the headlamp/indicator lenses. This is normal and will disappear (e.g. after the lamps have been on for a few minutes). If it does not, contact a CITROËN dealer.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing the lamps on the wing
Remove the lateral boot trim A.
To do so:
Pull it towards towards the inside of the boot.
Pull it upwards.
natural_image
3D-rendered abstract diagram with labeled points A, B, and C, no readable text or symbols
natural_image
Side view of a silver car with a red plastic head and a yellow arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)Disconnect the connector B.
Unscrew the fixing screw C
Remove the lamp from its housing.
natural_image
Red automotive body panel with mechanical components and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)Detach the bulb holder D.
Replace the faulty bulb.
Replace the bulb holder D.
Place the lamp in its housing.
Screw in the fixing screw C.
Connect the connector B.
Refit the trim A.
You can use the spare wheel jack handle to screw or unscrew the fixing screw C.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing number plate lights (W 5 W)
natural_image
Close-up of a car front panel with two yellow arrows pointing to specific slots (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with yellow arrows pointing to a slot (no visible text or symbols)Changing the third brake light (diodes)
natural_image
Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a red arrow pointing to a yellow arrow (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Close-up of a black plastic clip with a yellow arrow indicating direction, no visible text or symbolsRemove the lens.
Change the faulty bulb.
For the replacement of this type of diode light, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the external holes of the lens.
Push it outwards to unclip it.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing interior bulbs
natural_image
Close-up of a white electronic device with three transparent buttons and a yellow arrow pointing to it (no visible text or symbols)Interior lamps
√ Unclip the transparent cover of the interior lamp to reach the bulb.
Bulb: W 5 W
Boot lamp
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)^a Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
Floor lighting
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with yellow arrows pointing to the dashboard controls (no visible text or symbols)Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
Spotlamp
Detach the cover.
If necessary, detach the partition of the affected spotlamp.
Rear reading lamps (Tourer)
Detach the cover of the reading lamp to access the bulb.
Bulb: W 5 W
Pavement lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front wheel and door panel, showing a yellow arrow pointing to the door (no text or symbols visible)Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
Glovebox
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and rear seats with a yellow arrow pointing to a control panel (no visible text or symbols)Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing interior bulbs
natural_image
Close-up of a white electronic device with three transparent buttons and a yellow arrow pointing to it (no visible text or symbols)Interior lamps
√ Unclip the transparent cover of the interior lamp to reach the bulb.
Bulb: W 5 W
Boot lamp
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)^a Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
Floor lighting
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with yellow arrows pointing to the dashboard controls (no visible text or symbols)Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
Spotlamp
Detach the cover.
If necessary, detach the partition of the affected spotlamp.
Rear reading lamps (Tourer)
Detach the cover of the reading lamp to access the bulb.
Bulb: W 5 W
Pavement lighting
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front wheel and door panel, showing a yellow arrow pointing to the door (no text or symbols visible)Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
Glovebox
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and rear seats with a yellow arrow pointing to a control panel (no visible text or symbols)Detach the cover and use a W 5 W bulb.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
CHANGIN
Operating procedure for replacing a faulty fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding function.
The 2 fuseboxes are located below the dashboard and under the bonnet.
Replacing a fuse
Before replacing a fuse, you should ascertain the cause of the fault and have it remedied. The numbers of the fuses are indicated on the fuse-box.
Replace the fuse that has blown with one of the same rating (same colour).
Use the special pliers 1 placed on the fl ap close to the fuseboxes. The fl ap also has spare fuses available.
Good
Bad
Pliers 1
Fuses under the dashboard
Access to the fuses
open the storage box to its stopping point then pull firmly on it horizontally,
remove the trim by pulling sharply on the bottom.
When refi tting the storage box, observe the following advice:
- With the storage box horizontal, refi t the bottom ensuring that the lower cut-outs are in line with the pins.
- Give a sharp push to the front.
- Close the storage box, ensuring that the springs located behind pass over the top.
Fusebox A
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing the rearrest seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)
natural_image
Interior view of a mechanical device with control panel and buttons (no visible text or symbols)
Fusebox C
Replacement fuses and pliers 1
Fusebox B
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
CHANGIN
Operating procedure for replacing a faulty fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding function.
The 2 fuseboxes are located below the dashboard and under the bonnet.
Replacing a fuse
Before replacing a fuse, you should ascertain the cause of the fault and have it remedied. The numbers of the fuses are indicated on the fuse-box.
Replace the fuse that has blown with one of the same rating (same colour).
Use the special pliers 1 placed on the fl ap close to the fuseboxes. The fl ap also has spare fuses available.
Good
Bad
Pliers 1
Fuses under the dashboard
Access to the fuses
open the storage box to its stopping point then pull firmly on it horizontally,
remove the trim by pulling sharply on the bottom.
When refi tting the storage box, observe the following advice:
- With the storage box horizontal, refi t the bottom ensuring that the lower cut-outs are in line with the pins.
- Give a sharp push to the front.
- Close the storage box, ensuring that the springs located behind pass over the top.
Fusebox A
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing the rearrest seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)
natural_image
Interior view of a mechanical device with control panel and buttons (no visible text or symbols)
Fusebox C
Replacement fuses and pliers 1
Fusebox B
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
FUSEBOX A
Table of fuses
| Fuse N° | Rating | Function |
| G29 | - | - |
| G30 | 5 A | Heated rear view mirrors |
| G31 | 5 A | Rain and brightness sensor |
| G32 | 5 A | Seat belt not fastened warning lamps |
| G33 | 5 A | Electrochrome rear view mirrors |
| G34 | 20 A | Sunroof (saloon) |
| G35 | 5 A | Passenger door lighting - passenger rear view mirror adjustment |
| G36 | 30 A | Electric tailgate (Tourer) |
| G37 | 20 A | Heated front seats |
| G38 | 30 A | Driver's electric seat |
| G39 | 30 A | Passenger's electric seat - HIFI amplifier |
| G40 | 3 A | Trailer relay unit supply |
FUSEBOX E
| Fuse N° | Rating | Function |
| G36 | 15 A | 6 speed automatic gearbox |
| 5 A | 4 speed automatic gearbox | |
| G37 | 10 A | Daytime-running lamps - Diagnostic socket |
| G38 | 3 A | ESP |
| G39 | 10 A | Hydraulic suspension |
| G40 | 3 A | STOP switch |
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
FUSEBOX C
| Fuse N° | Rating | Function |
| F1 | 15 A | Rear screen wipe (Tourer) |
| F2 | 30 A | Locking and deadlocking relay |
| F3 | 5 A | Airbags |
| F4 | 10 A | Automatic gearbox - additional heater unit (Diesel) - electrochrome rear view mirrors |
| F5 | 30 A | Front window - sun roof - passenger door lighting - passenger rear view mirror adjustment |
| F6 | 30 A | Rear window |
| F7 | 5 A | Vanity mirror lighting - Glove box lighting - interior lamps - torch (Tourer) |
| F8 | 20 A | Radio - CD changer - Controls at the steering wheel - Display - Deflation detection - Electric boot ECU |
| F9 | 30 A | Cigar-lighter - front 12 V socket |
| F10 | 15 A | Alarm - Controls on the steering wheel, signalling and screen wipe controls |
| F11 | 15 A | Low current anti-theft switch |
| F12 | 15 A | Driver's electric seat - instrument panel - seat belt not fastened warning lamps -air conditioning controls |
| F13 | 5 A | Engine relay unit - Hydraulic suspension pump cut-off relay - airbag ECU supply |
| F14 | 15 A | Rain and brightness sensor - parking assistance - passenger's electric seat - trailer relay unit - HIFI amplifi er ECU - Hands-free kit - Lane Departure Warning System |
| F15 | 30 A | Locking and deadlocking relay |
| F17 | 40 A | Heated rear screen - exterior heated rear view mirrors |
| FSH | SHUNT | PARK SHUNT |
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Fuses under the bonnet
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical device interior showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)Access to the fuses
- Undo each screw by a 1/4 turn.
natural_image
Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbolsAfter a repair, take care to re-close the cover.
Any repairs on the MAXI fuses (that give additional protection), located in the fuseboxes, must be left to a CITROËN dealer.
Table of fuses
| Fuse N° | Rating | Function |
| F1 | 20 A | Engine control unit |
| F2 | 15 A | Horn |
| F3 | 10 A | Screen wash pump |
| F4 | 10 A | Headlamp wash pump |
| F5 | 15 A | Starter |
| F6 | 10 A | Air flow meter - Directional headlamps - Diagnostic socket |
| F7 | 10 A | Automatic gearbox lever lock - Power steering |
| F8 | 25 A | Starter |
| F9 | 10 A | Clutch switch - Stop switch |
| F10 | 30 A | Starter |
| F11 | 40 A | Air conditioning blower |
| F12 | 30 A | Wipers |
| F13 | 40 A | BSI supply (ignition on) |
| F14 | 30 A | - |
| F15 | 10 A | Right-hand main beam |
| F16 | 10 A | Left-hand main beam |
| F17 | 15 A | Right-hand dipped beam |
| F18 | 15 A | Left-hand dipped beam |
| F19 | 15 A | Starter |
| F20 | 10 A | Starter |
| F21 | 5 A | Starter |
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Fuses on the battery (All engines except V6 HDi)
natural_image
Close-up of a battery pack with a curved internal component and two marked terminals (no text or symbols visible)Access to the fuses
detach and remove the cover,
change the fuse.
Table of fuses
| Fuse N° | Rating | Function |
| F6 | 25 A | Rear 12 V socket (max power: 100 W) |
| F7 | 15 A | Foglamps |
| F8 | 20 A | Additional burner (Diesel) |
| F9 | 30 A | Electric parking brake |
Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with either standard or optional equipment.
Before installing electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, consult a CITROËN dealer.
CITROËN declines all responsibility for the consequences and costs that are caused by faults or repairs on your vehicle resulting from the installation of accessories that are not supplied and/or not recommended by CITROËN and not installed in conformity with its requirements, particularly when the total consumption of additional devices exceeds 10 milliamperes.
The Maxi fuses give additional protection to electrical systems. any work on them must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer.
After a repair, take care to re-close the cover.
If the cover is not correctly positioned or not properly closed, this could cause serious problems on your vehicle. For the same reason, take care not to spill any liquid in the fusebox.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
BAT
Procedure for charging your battery when it is flat or for starting the engine using another battery.
Access to the battery
natural_image
Close-up of an automotive battery pack with wiring and internal components (no visible text or symbols)The battery is located under the bonnet.
To gain access to it:
open the bonnet using the interior lever, then the exterior lever,
secure the bonnet strut,
remove the plastic cover to gain access to the two terminals,
unclip the fuse box to remove the battery, if necessary.
V6 HDi engine
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical device with a red lid and black base, no visible text or symbolsThe battery is located in the boot under the left-hand wing trim.
To gain access to it:
open the boot,
open the flap and remove the battery.
Starting using another battery
Lift the pins to remove the front left headlamp cover (V6 HDi engine).
Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.
Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B.
V6 HDi engine: The negative terminal (-) is located under the red cover.
Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle.
Operate the starter, let the engine run.
Wait until the engine returns to idle and disconnect the cables.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Charging the battery using a battery charger
√ Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger.
Reconnect starting with the negative terminal (-).
Check that the terminals and connectors are clean. If they are covered with sulphate (whitish or greenish deposit), remove them and clean them.
The batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste.
Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
Do not disconnect the terminals while the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without disconnecting the terminals first.
Do not touch the clips during the operation.
Do not lean over the batteries.
Disconnect the cables in the reverse order to connection, ensuring that they do not touch.
Before disconnecting the battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery.
Close the windows and the doors before disconnecting the battery.
Following reconnection of the battery
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems. However, if slight diffi culties are encountered following this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise:
- the remote control key,
- the glass panoramic roof shutter,
- the GPS satellite navigation system.
It is advisable to disconnect the battery if the vehicle is to be left unused for more than one month.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
ENERGY ECONOMY MO
System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped headlamps, courtesy lights, etc. for a maximum combined duration of thirty minutes.
Switching to economy mode
Once the thirty minutes are over, a message appears on the multi-function display indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby.
If the telephone is being used at this time:
- it will be maintained for 5 minutes with radio-CD hands-free kit,
- it will be interrupted after 10 minutes with the MyWay audio-navigation system,
- you can complete your call with the NaviDrive system.
This period may be significantly reduced if the battery charge is low.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven.
F In order to resume the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run for a few minutes.
The time available will then be double the duration for which the engine was left running. However, this time will always be between fi ve and thirty minutes.
A flat battery prevents the engine from starting (refer to the corresponding paragraph).
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
TOWING THE VEHIC
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tools
natural_image
Cross-sectional view of a mechanical or electrical component with internal structure and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)The towing eye is installed in the jack box placed in the spare wheel.
To gain access to it:
open the boot,
raise the floor,
remove the towing eye from the jack box.
Towing your vehicle
natural_image
Close-up of a silver car's front grille and dashboard, showing no visible text or symbolsOn the front bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the top.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towbar.
Switch on the hazard warning lights on the towed vehicle.
Place the gear lever in neutral (position N on the automatic gearbox).
Failure to observe this special condition could result in damage to certain braking components and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.
Towing another vehicle
natural_image
Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Side view of a car's rear bumper with a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by pressing:
- on the right (Saloon),
- at the bottom (Tourer).
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towbar.
Switch on the hazard warning lights on the towed vehicle.
When towing with all four wheels on the ground, always use a towbar.
When towing with only two wheels on the ground, always use professional lifting equipment.
When towing with the engine off, there is no longer any braking or steering assistance.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
TOWING A TRAILEF CARAVAN, ETC.
Towbar suited to the attachment of a trailer or caravan with additional signalling and lighting.
natural_image
Side view of a silver sedan car (no visible text or symbols)Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.
We recommend the use of original CITROËN towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fi tting of the towbar is entrusted to a CITROËN dealer.
If the trailer is not fitted by a CITROËN dealer, it is imperative that it is fitted using the electrical pre-equipment installed at the rear of the vehicle, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Driving with a trailer subjects the towing vehicle to more significant stress and its driver must be particularly careful.
Driving advice
Distribution of loads
- Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above 1 000 metres, the maximum towing load must be reduced by 10 % and so on for every 1 000 metres of altitude.
Refer to the "Technical Data" section for details of the weights and towing loads which apply to your vehicle.
Side wind
Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.
The maximum towing load on a long slope depends on the gradient and the outside temperature.
In all cases, pay attention to the coolant temperature.
If the warning light and the STOP warning light come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
Tyres
Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.
Lights
Check the electrical signalling on the trailer.
The rear parking assistance will be deactivated automatically if an original CITROËN towbar is used.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
ROOF B.
The design of your vehicle, for your safety and to avoid damage to the roof and tailgate, requires the use of roof bars that are tested and approved by CITROËN.
Regardless of the type of loading equipment to be transported on the roof (bicycle carrier, ski carrier...), it is imperative that you add transverse roof bars.
Recommendations
- Distribute your load evenly, avoiding overloading on one side.
Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof.
Anchor the load securely and draw attention to it if any part of it is overhanging.
Drive gently, as the vehicle will be more liable to the effects of side winds (vehicle stability may be altered).
Remove the roof bars as soon as they are no longer needed.
Maximum load that can be distributed on the roof bars (for a loading height not exceeding 40 cm; except bicycle carrier): 80 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt your speed to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fi xings on the roof.
Please refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations concerning the transportation of objects which are longer than the vehicle.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
VERY COLD PROTECTIC
Moveable device which prevents the intake of snow particles, which could obstruct the air filter.
Diesel engine HDi 173 FAP
Normal situation
The shutter 2 is in a horizontal position in the air duct 3.
Snow situation
Push and rotate the knob 1 by 90° in the direction of the arrow in order to position the shutter 2 in a vertical position in the air duct 3.
To return to the normal situation, push the knob 1 then rotate in the opposite direction.
Diesel engine V6 HDi 208 FAP
Snow situation
Slide the deflector 1 into the air duct 2 and clip in.
It is essential to remove the very cold protection:
- When the outside temperature exceeds 10 °C.
- When driving at speeds of over 75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
SNOW GUA
Moveable device which prevents the accumulation of snow by the radiator cooling fan.
Fitting
Bring the 2 sections of the snow guard up to the upper and lower sections of the front bumper.
Press on the surround to clip in one by one the fixing clips.
natural_image
Front view of a silver car with a white三菱 symbol on the grille (no text or symbols visible)Before fi tting
natural_image
Front view of a silver car grille with a yellow arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)After fi tting
Remove
Using a screwdriver, lift it up to detach each fixing clip one by one.
It is essential to remove the snow guard:
- When the outside temperature exceeds 10 °C,
- When towing,
- When driving at speeds of over 75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).
* According to country.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
natural_image
Abstract graphic with white boxes, a lock icon, a car, and a walking figure on blue and yellow backgrounds (no text or symbols)ACCESSORIES
A wide range of accessories and original parts is offered by the CITROËN network.
These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle and benefit from CITROËN's recommendation and warranty.
This product range is structured around 5 categories:
"Protection": anti-theft alarm, wheel anti-theft devices, stolen vehicle tracking system, breathalyser, first aid kit, warning triangle, high visibility safety jacket, dog guard, snow chains, non-skid covers, fog lamps kit, puncture repair kit, rear parking assistance...
"Comfort and leisure": mats *, boot tray, boot carpet, sun blinds, mini-bar, fragrance cartridges, roof bars, bicycle carrier, ski carrier, roof boxes, towbars, child seats and booster cushions...
"Navigation and communication": Bluetooth® hands-free kit, audio equipment, portable satellite navigation system, DVD player, auxiliary cable for connecting a portable MP3 player, USB Box, speakers...
* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned and secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
"Personalisation": seat covers, alloy wheels, wheel trims, mud flaps...
"Accessories": windscreen wash fluid, interior and exterior cleaning and maintenance products, body-work touch-up aerosol and pen...
Depending on the country in which the vehicle is sold, it may be compulsory to have a high visibility safety jacket, warning triangle and spare bulbs available in the vehicle.
The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by CITROËN may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excess consumption. Please note this specific warning. You are advised to contact a CITROËN representative to be shown the range of recommended equipment and accessories.
TECHNICAL DATA
| MODELS: | ENGINES AND GEARBOXES | ||||
| Model codes:RD... RW... | 6FYC | RFJC | RFJF | RFJC/FF | XFVJ |
| PETROL ENGINES | 1.8 l. 16V127 bhp | 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | Biofl ex 2 l.16V 143 bhp | 3 l. V6 24V215 bhp | |
| Cubic capacity (cm ^3 ) 1 749 1 997 | 1 997 2 946 | ||||
| Bore x stroke (mm) 82.7 x 81.4 | 85 x 88 85 x 88 | 87 x 82.6 | |||
| EU standard maximum power (kW) | 92 | 103 | 103 | 155 | |
| Maximum power engine speed (rpm) | 6 000 6 000 | 6 000 6 000 | |||
| EU standard maximum torque (Nm) | 170 | 200 | 200 | 290 | |
| Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) | 3 750 4 000 | 4 000 3 750 | |||
| Fuel | Unleaded | Unleaded | Unleaded/E85 | Unleaded | |
| Catalytic converter | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
| GEARBOXES | Manual(5-speed) | Manual(5-speed) | Auto.(4-speed) | Manual(5-speed) | Auto.(6-speed) |
| OIL CAPACITIES (in litres) | |||||
| Engine (with cartridge replacement) | 5 | 5 | 5 | - | 4.75 |
| Gearbox - Final drive | - | - | - | - | - |
TECHNICAL DATA
| MODELS: | ENGINES AND GEARBOXES | ||||
| Model codes:RD... RW.... | 9HZC9HZC/1 | RHF8 | RHRJ | 4HTH | UHZJ |
| DIESEL ENGINES | 1.6 I. HDi 110 bhp | 2 I. HDi140 bhp | 2 I. HDi138 bhp | 2 I. HDi 173 bhp | V6 HDi 208 bhp |
| Cubic capacity (cm ^2 ) 1 560 1 997 | 2 179 2 720 | ||||
| Bore x stroke (mm) | 75 x 88.3 | 85 x 88 | 85 x 96 | 81 x 88 | |
| EU standard maximum power (kW) | 80 | 103 | 100 | 125 | 150 |
| Maximum power engine speed (rpm) | 4 000 4 000 | 4 000 | 4 000 | ||
| EU standard maximum torque (Nm) | 240 | 320 | 370 440 | ||
| Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) | 1 750 2 000 | 1 500 | 1 900 | ||
| Fuel | Diesel | Diesel | Diesel | Diesel | |
| Catalytic converter | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
| Particle emission filter (PEF) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
| GEARBOXES | Manual(5-speed) | Manual(6-speed) | Auto.(6-speed) | Manual(6-speed) | Auto.(6-speed) |
| OIL CAPACITIES (in litres) | |||||
| Engine (with cartridge replacement) | 3.75 | 5.25 | 5.25 | 5.5 | |
| Gearbox - Final drive | 1.9 | - | - | - | - |
TECHNICAL DATA
| CONSUMPTION (SALOON) | In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE | |||||
| Petrol engines | Gearboxes | Model codes: RD... | Urban driving (litres/100 km) | Inter-urban driving (litres/100 km) | Mixed driving (litres/100 km) | Emission of CO _2 by weight (g/km) |
| 1.8 l. 16V 127 bhp | Manual | 6FYC | 10.8 | 6.2 | 7.9 | 188 |
| 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | Manual | RFJC | 12 | 6.3 | 8.4 | 198 |
| Auto. | RFJF | 12.7 | 6.7 | 8.9 | 212 | |
| Biofl ex 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | Manual | RFJC/FF | 12 * 6.3 * 8.4 * | 198 * | ||
| 15.5** | 9.1** | 11.4** | 189** | |||
| 3 l. V6 24V 215 bhp | Auto. | XFVJ | 15.6 | 7.5 | 10.5 | 248 |
* Unleaded.
** E85.
Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are perfectly compatible with E5 type petrol biofuels (containing 5 % ethanol), conforming to European standard EN 228.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15376.
For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol (type E100).
The consumption figures shown here correspond to the values communicated at the time of printing.
These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending on the style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and the use of equipment.
TECHNICAL DATA
| CONSUMPTION (TOURER) | In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE | |||||
| Petrol engines | Gearboxes | Model codes: RW... | Urban driving (litres/100 km) | Inter-urban driving (litres/100 km) | Mixed driving (litres/100 km) | Emission of CO2 by weight (g/km) |
| 1.8 l. 16V 127 bhp | Manual | 6FYC | 11.1 | 6.3 | 8.1 | 192 |
| 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | Manual | RFJC | 12.1 | 6.4 | 8.5 | 200 |
| Auto. | RFJF | 12.8 | 6.8 | 9 | 214 | |
| Biofl ex 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | Manual | RFJC/FF | 12.1* | 6.4* | 8.5* | 200* |
| 15.6 ** | 9.2 ** | 11.5 ** | 191 ** | |||
| 3 l. V6 24V 215 bhp | Auto. | XFVJ | 15.7 | 7.6 | 10.6 | 250 |
* Unleaded.
** E85.
The consumption figures shown here correspond to the values communicated at the time of printing.
These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending on the style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and the use of equipment.
TECHNICAL DATA
| CONSUMPTION (SALOON) | In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE | |||||
| Diesel engines | Gearboxes | Model codes: RD... | Urban driving (litres/100 km) | Inter-urban driving (litres/100 km) | Mixed driving (litres/100 km) | Emission of CO2 by weight (g/km) |
| 1.6 I. HDi 110 bhp Airdream | Manual | 9HZC/1 | 6.6 | 4.6 | 5.3 | 140 |
| 1.6 I. HDi 110 bhp | Manual | 9HZC | 7.3 | 4.7 | 5.6 | 149 |
| 2 I. HDi 140 bhp | Manual | RHF8 | 7.5 | 4.8 | 5.8 | 153 |
| 2 I. HDi 138 bhp | Auto. | RHRJ | 9.9 | 5.5 | 7.1 | 189 |
| 2 I. HDi 173 bhp | Manual | 4HTH | 8.8 | 5.2 | 6.5 | 172 |
| V6 HDi 208 bhp | Auto. | UHZJ | 11.8 | 6.4 | 8.4 | 223 |
The consumption figures shown here correspond to the values communicated at the time of printing.
These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending on the style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and the use of accessories.
Quality of the fuel used for Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible with biofuels which conform to current and future European standards (diesel fuel which complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214) which can be distributed at the pumps (possible incorporation of 0 to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel (vegetable or animal oils, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel circuit).
TECHNICAL DATA
| CONSUMPTION (TOURER) | In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE | |||||
| Diesel engines | Gearboxes | Model codes: RW... | Urban driving (litres/100 km) | Inter-urban driving (litres/100 km) | Mixed driving (litres/100 km) | Emission of CO _2 by weight (g/km) |
| 1.6 I. HDi 110 bhp Airdream | Manual | 9HZC/1 | 6.6 | 4.6 | 5.3 | 140 |
| 1.6 I. HDi 110 bhp | Manual | 9HZC | 7.4 | 4.8 | 5.7 | 150 |
| 2 I. HDi 140 bhp | Manual | RHF8 | 7.6 | 4.9 | 5.9 | 155 |
| 2 I. HDi 138 bhp | Auto. | RHRJ | 10 | 5.6 | 7.2 | 191 |
| 2 I. HDi 173 bhp | Manual | 4HTH | 8.9 | 5.3 | 6.6 | 175 |
| V6 HDi 208 bhp | Auto. | UHZJ | 11.9 | 6.5 | 8.5 | 225 |
The consumption figures shown here correspond to the values communicated at the time of printing. These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending on the style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and the use of accessories.
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg
| Petrol engines | 1.8 l. 16V 127 bhp | 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | Biofl ex 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | 3 l. V6 24V 215 bhp | |
| Gearboxes | Manual | Manual | Auto. | Manual | Auto. |
| Model codes: RD.... | 6FYC | RFJC | RFJF | RFJC/FF | XFVJ |
| - Unladen weight | 1 510 | 1 521 | 1 583 | 1 521 | 1 725 |
| - Kerb weight | 1 585 | 1 596 | 1 658 | 1 596 | 1 800 |
| - Payload | 505 | 542 | 507 | 542 | 505 |
| - Gross vehicle weight (GVW) | 2 015 | 2 063 | 2 090 | 2 063 | 2 230 |
| - Gross train weight (GTW) | 3 315 | 3 563 | 3 590 | 3 563 | 3 630 |
| - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient | 1 300 | 1 500 | 1 500 | 1 400 | |
| - Braked trailer * (with load transfer within GTW limit) | 1 530 | 1 720 | 1 720 | 1 650 | |
| - Unbraked trailer | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 | |
| - Recommended nose weight | 62 | 69 | 69 | 66 | |
The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C , limit the weight towed.
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg
| Petrol engines | 1.8 l. 16V 127 bhp | 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | Biofl ex 2 l. 16V 143 bhp | 3 l. V6 24V 215 bhp | ||||
| Gearboxes | Manual | Manual | Auto. | Manual | Auto. | |||
| Model codes: RW... | 6FYC | RFJC | RFJF | RFJC/FF | XFVJ | |||
| - | Unladen weight | 1 549 | 1 578 | 1 619 | 1 578 | 1 761 | ||
| - | Kerb weight | 1 624 | 1 653 | 1 694 | 1 653 | 1 836 | ||
| - | Payload | 605 | 605 | 605 | 605 | 605 | ||
| - | Gross vehicle weight (GVW) | 2 154 | 2 183 | 2 224 | 2 183 | 2 366 | ||
| - | Gross train weight (GTW) | 3 454 | 3 683 | 3 724 | 3 683 | 3 666 | ||
| - | Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient | 1 300 | 1 500 | 1 500 | 1300 | |||
| - | Braked trailer * (with load transfer within GTW limit) | 1 600 | 1 790 | 1 800 | 1 790 | 1 600 | ||
| - | Unbraked trailer | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 | |||
| - | Recommended nose weight | 64 | 72 | 72 | 68 | |||
The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C , limit the weight towed.
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg
| Diesel engines | 1.6 I. HDi 110 bhp | 2 I. HDi 140 bhp | 2 I. HDi 138 bhp | 2 I. HDi 173 bhp | V6 HDi 208 bhp |
| Gearboxes | Manual | Manual | Auto. | Manual | Auto. |
| Model codes: RD... | 9HZC 9HZC/1 | RHF8 | RHRJ | 4HTH | UHZJ |
| - Unladen weight 1 503 1 608 | 1 658 1 729 | 1 766 | |||
| - Kerb weight 1 578 1 683 | 1 733 1 804 | 1 841 | |||
| - Payload | 537 | 547 | 532 | 487 | 544 |
| - Gross vehicle weight (GVW) | 2 040 2 155 | 2 190 2 216 | 2 310 | ||
| - Gross train weight (GTW) | 3 140 | 3 755 3 490 | 3 816 3 710 | ||
| - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient | 1 100 | 1 600 | 1 300 | 1 600 | 1 400 |
| - Braked trailer * (with load transfer within GTW limit) | 1 370 1 820 | 1 560 1 820 | 1 690 | ||
| - Unbraked trailer | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 |
| - Recommended nose weight | 55 | 73 | 63 | 73 | 68 |
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg
| Diesel engines | 1.6 I. HDi 110 bhp | 2 I. HDi 140 bhp | 2 I. HDi 138 bhp | 2 I. HDi 173 bhp | V6 HDi 208 bhp |
| Gearboxes | Manual | Manual | Auto. | Manual | Auto. |
| Model codes: RW... | 9HZC 9HZC/1 | RHF8 | RHRJ | 4HTH | UHZJ |
| - Unladen weight | 1 537 | 1 655 | 1 695 | 1 765 | 1 802 |
| - Kerb weight | 1 612 | 1 730 | 1 770 | 1 840 | 1 877 |
| - Payload | 641 | 621 | 631 | 587 | 571 |
| - Gross vehicle weight (GVW) | 2 178 | 2 276 | 2 326 | 2 352 | 2 373 |
| - Gross train weight (GTW) | 3 178 | 3 776 | 3 526 | 3 952 | 3 676 |
| - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient | 1 000 | 1 500 | 1 200 | 1 600 | 1 300 |
| - Braked trailer * (with load transfer within GTW limit) | 1 300 1 800 | 1 500 | 1 900 1 600 | ||
| - Unbraked trailer | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 |
| - Recommended nose weight | 52 | 72 | 60 | 77 | 64 |
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C , limit the weight towed.
TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS (IN
Exterior (Saloon)
| A | 2 815 |
| B | 1 054 |
| C | 910 |
| D | 4 779 |
| E | 1 586 |
| F | 2 096 |
| G | 1 557 |
| H | 1 860 |
| I* | 1 451 |
* Without roof bars.
TECHNICAL DATA
Interior (Saloon)
| A | 1 030 |
| B | 1 115 |
| C | 566 |
| D | 504 |
| E | 1 040 |
| F | 1 705 |
TECHNICAL DATA
Exterior (Tourer)
| A | 2 815 |
| B | 1 054 |
| C | 959 |
| D | 4 829 |
| E | 1 586 |
| F | 2 096 |
| G | 1 557 |
| H | 1 860 |
| I * | 1 479 |
* Without roof bars.
TECHNICAL DATA
Interior (Tourer)
| A | 1 060 |
| B | 1 115 |
| C | 510 |
| D | 851 |
| E | 1 058 |
| F | 1 723 |
natural_image
Top-down view of a white car showing the rear canopy with labeled parts A and B, no text or symbols present.
TECHNICAL DATA
IDENTIFICATION F
Various visible marking devices for identification and tracking of the vehicle.
The vehicle type and the identification number are also indicated on the registration document.
All CITROËN original replacement parts are available exclusively within the dealer network.
For your safety and in order to remain within the terms of the guarantee, you are advised to use only CITROEN replacement parts.
A. Chassis number plate
On the left hand door centre pillar.
- EU type approval number.
- Vehicle identification no. (VIN).
- Gross vehicle weight.
- Gross train weight.
- Maximum weight on front axle.
- Maximum weight on rear axle.
B. Body serial number
C. Serial number on dashboard
D. Paint colour code and tyre reference
Tyre pressure
On the left hand door centre pillar.
Observe the tyre pressures indicated by CITROËN.
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold.
Never defl ate a warm tyre.
When changing tyres, it is imperative that the sizes recommended for your vehicle are used.
Autora
AUDIO EQUIPMENT/HANDS-FREE KIT
Your Autoradio is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for configuration the system.
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operation which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary
When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, your Autoradio may switch o after a few minutes
CONTENTS
• 01 First steps pg. 208
• 02 General menu pg. 209
• 03 Audio pg. 210
• 04 Hands-free kit pg. 214
• 05 Control short-cuts pg. 215
• 06 Confi guration pg. 216
• 07 Display flow chart pg. 217
• Frequently asked questions pg. 218
01 FIRST STEPS
1 On/Off and volume adjustment.
2. CD eject.
3. Selection of the screen display mode.
4. Selection of the source: radio and CD and CD changer.
5 Selection of the FM1, FM2, FMast and AM wavebands.
6. Setting the audio options: front/rear balance, left/right balance, loudness, sound ambiences
7. Displaying of the list of local stations, of the tracks on the CD or of the MP3 directories
8. Abandon current operation.
9 TA (Traffi c Announcement) function on/off.
Long press: access to the PTY
(TTypes of radio Programme) mode
10 Confirmation
11. Automatic search for a lower/higher frequency Selection of previous/next CD or MP3 track.
12 Selection of a lower/higher radio frequency
Selection of the previous/next MP3 directory.
13 Displaying of the general menu
- Buttons 1 to 6: Selection of a stored radio station. Long press: storing of a station.
- The DARK button changes the display on the screen to improve driving comfort at night. 1st press: lighting of the top banner only. 2nd press: black screen display. 3rd press: return to the standard display.
GENERAL MI 02
MONOCHROME DISPLAY
For a detailed global view of tl menus available, refer to the "Display flow charts" section of this chapter
AUDIO FUNCTIONS radio, CD, options.
TELEPHONE hands-free kit, matching, management of a communication.
natural_image
Three orange icons representing electronic devices: a CD, a USB flash unit, and a Bluetooth device (no text or symbols)
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION vehicle parameters, display, languages
03 AUI
RADI SELECTING A STATIO
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio equipment!
RD
Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select the radio.
Press the MENU buttor
Press the BAND AST button to select a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS the press OK
Briefly press one of the buttons carry out an automatic search of the radio stations.
Select the FM WAVEBAN PREFERENCES function their press OK
Press one of the buttons to carry out manual search of the radio stations
Select ACTIVATE FREQUENCY FOLLOWING (RDS) then press OK RDS appears on the display
Press the LIST REFRESH button t display the list of stations received locally (30 stations maximum) To update this list, press for more than two seconds.
The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station by means of frequency following. However, in certain conditions, this RDS station is not followed throughout the count as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey:
C[
PLAYING A C
Insert circular compact discs only
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CD copied using a personal recorder, may cause fault which are no reflection on the quality of the origin player.
Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically
1
To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD.
2
Press one of the buttons to select track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on the CD Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind play
MF
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATIO
Insert an MP3 compilation in the playe
The audio equipment searches for all of the mus tracks, which may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds, before pla begins
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 fi les spre over 8 directory levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played
While the CD is being played, th directory flow chart is not followed
All of the fi les are displayed on single level. To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select track on the CD
Press the LIST REFRESH button t display the list of directories of the MP3 compilation
Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind play
03
A
MP3 Cl
INFORMATION AND ADVIC
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer is an audio compression standard which permits the recording several tens of music files on a single dis
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when record it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Jolie If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum for optimum sound quality
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard recommended
The audio equipment will only play fi les with the extension ".mp with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi (.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without us special characters (e.g. " " ? ; ü) to avoid any playing or displayin problems.
CD CHANG PLAYING A CD (NOT MP3 COMPATIBL)
Insert the CDs in the changer one b one.
Press the SOURCE button severa times in succession and selec CD CHANGER.
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad to select the corresponding CD
Press one of the buttons to select track on the CD
Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forwards or rewind play
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (JACK/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIE
The auxiliary input permits the connection of portable equipme (MP3 player...). It is activated by default
Connect the portable equipmer (MP3 player...) to the audio socket: (white and red, RCA type) located in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.
Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select AUX
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE AUXILIARY SOURCE
1
First adjust the volume of your portable equipmer
2
Then adjust the volume of your audi equipment.
#
The controls are displayed and managed via portable equipment
04
HANDS-FREE
MATCHING A TELEPHON
The services offered by the hands-free kit depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which services are available to you. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from the network.
Consult a CITROËN dealer
!
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention the part of the driver, the operations for matching of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with your Autoradio's hands-free kit must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition or
1
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function ar carry out a search of the Bluetooth accessorie present for the telephone
2
Select the accessory which corresponds to the name of the vehicle, a superimposed confi guratic display appears on the multifunction display
3
Enter the vehicle's authentication code (=1234) Depending on the telephone, you may be asked to enter this code before the superimposed configuration display appears
4
Select the YES tab on the display using the buttons then confirm by pressing Or
YES
RECEIVING A CAL
1
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed displ on the multifunction display
2
Select the YES tab on the display us the buttons and confirm by pressing (
YES
[Non-Text]
Press the steering wheel control TEL to ace the call.
![CITROEN C5 Dag (2008) - [Non-Text] - 1](/content/2026/05/791481/images/cfd8e95e67b306679d558d4589a538b3427ccef92c15a400a662aadae983ab60.jpg)
MAKING A CAL
The image contains a graphical symbol resembling a light bulb with a starburst effect. There is no textual content to extract.
Press the steering wheel control TEL to access yo directory
1
To dial a number, use the keypad on yo telephone
05 CONTROL SHORT-CUTS
STEERING WHEEL CONTROL:
- Activation/deactivation of the Black Panel mode (night driving)
- Pick up an incoming call/hang up a call which is in progress
Open the telephone menu and displaying of the call list. Long press: refuse an incoming call. - Access to the short-cut menus in accordance with the display on the screen
Confirmation of the function selected from a menu. Rotation:
Selection of the previous/next stored RADIO station. Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 directory. Selection of the previous/next CD in the CD changer - Abandon the current operation.
Refuse an incoming call.
Long press: return to the main display. - Access to the main menu
- Volume increase
- Volume decrease
- Mute
- RADIO: automatic search for a lower/higher frequency. CD/MP3/CD CHANGER:
selection of the previous/next track.
continuous press: fast forwards/rewind play.
- RADIO: displaying of the list of stations available
Long press: updating of the list of radio stations.
CD/MP3/CD CHANGER:
displaying of the list of CD and directory tracks.
06
CONFIGURA
ADJUSTING THE DAT AND TIME
Press the MENU button
Using the arrows, select the PERSONALISATION CONFIGURATION function
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION
Press to confirm the selectio
Using the arrows, select the DISPLA CONFIGURATION function
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
Press to confirm the selectic
Using the arrows, select the ADJUS DATE AND TIME functor
ADJUST DATE AND TIMI
Press to confirm the selectic
Adjust the parameters one by on confirming by pressing the OK button Next select the OK tab on the displa then confi rr
OK
07
DISPLAY FLOW CHART monochrc
AUDIO FUNCTION
FM BAND PREFERENCE
alternative frequencies (RD:
activate/deactivat
regional mode (REC
activate/deactivat
radio-text information (RDTX)
activate/deactivat
AUDIO CD PREFERENCE
track random play (RDM
activate/deactivat
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATIC
DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS*
DISPLAY CONFIGURATIC
video brightness adjustment
normal video
inverse video
brightness (- +) adjustmer
date and time adjustmen
day/month/year adjustmer
hour/minute adjustment
choice of 12 n/24 n mod
choice of uni
l/100 km - mpg - km.
"Celsius/Fahrenheit"
CHOICE OF LANGUAG
* The parameters vary according to vehi (refer to the "Multifunction displays" section)
** According to compatibility of Bluetooth telepho and service contract.
TELEPHON
CONSULTING DIRECTORIES
telephone director
call lo
services director
customer contact centr
breakdown ca
emergency ca
CONFIGURATIO
deletion of a matc
list of matche
consulting matche
list of matche
choice of a mobile to conn
list of mobile
MANAGEMENT OF A COMMUNICATIC
switch
terminate the current ca
secret mod
activate/deactivat
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your Autoradio.
| QUESTION | RESPONSE | SOLUTION |
| There is a difference i sound quality between the different audic sources (radio CD changer...) | For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treb Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound source which may result in audible differences when changing sourc (radio, CD changer...) | Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bas Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted t the sources listened to. It is advisable to se the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rea Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middl position, select the musical ambience "None and set the loudness correction to the "Active position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" positio in radio mode |
| The CD is ejecte automatically or is no played by the player | The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any auc data or contains an audio format which the player cannot plaThe CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is r recognised by the audio equipmen | - Check that the CD is inserted in the player right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD canr be played if it is too damaged- Check the content in the case of a record CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" sector- The audio equipment's CD player does r play DVDs.- Due to inadequate quality, certain record CDs will not be played by the audio system |
| The CD player soun is poor | The CD used is scratched or of poor qualit | Insert good quality CDs and store them i suitable conditions. |
| The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitab | Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selectir an ambience. | |
| The stored stations d not function (no sound 87.5 Mhz is displayed...) | An incorrect waveband is selected | Press the BAND AST button to return to the waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the stations are stored |
| The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. I c not receive any traffic information | The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information netwc | Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic information |
| The quality of receiptio of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations dc not function (nc sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...) | The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehic is travelling. | Activate the RDS function to enable the syste to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area |
| The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) blo reception, including in RDS mode | This phenomenon is normal and does no indicate a failure of the audio equipment | |
| The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when goir through a car wash or into an underground car park | Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN deals | |
| Sound cut-outs of to 2 seconds in radic mode | During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequen permitting better reception of the station | Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route |
| With the engine of the audio equipment switches off after ε few minutes of use | When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating tin depends on the battery chargeThe switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's batter | Start the vehicle's engine to increase the batte charge. |
| The message "the audi system is overheated" appears on the display | In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is to high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protective mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playir of the CD. | Switch the audio system off for a few minutes allow the system to cool |
NaviDrive 3C
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH TELEPHON
GPS EUROP
The NaviDrive 3D is protected in such a way that will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a CITROEN dealer fc configuration of the system
For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary
When the engine is switched off and to preve discharging of the battery, the NaviDrive 3D switches c following the activation of the Energy Economy mode
Certain functions described in this handbook will become available during the course of the year
CONTENTS
• 01 First steps pg. 2
• 02 General operation pg. 4
• 03 Navigation - Guidance pg. 7
• 04 Traffi c information pg. 15
• 05 Radio pg. 16
• 06 Music media players pg. 17
• 07 Making a telephone call pg. 22
• 08 Confi guration pg
• Voice commands
and steering wheel contro pg. 28
• 10 Display flow charts pg. 31
Frequently asked question central pgs.
01 FIRST STEPS
NaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL
Short press: clears the last character.
Long press: activates the voice recognition.
1 CD eject.
2. RADIO: Access to the RADIO menu.
Displaying of the list of stations in alphabetical order (FM waveband) or frequency order (AM waveband).
MEDIA: Access to the MEDIA menu (Audio CD, Jukebox, External Device), Displaying of the list of tracks. Change of source
NAV: access to the NAVIGATION menu and displaying of the last destinations.
ESC: Abandon the operation in progress
Long press: return to the main display.
TRAFFIC: access to the TRAFFIC menu (function described in detail in sections 02 and 10).
ADDR BOOK: access to the ADDRESS BOOK menu (function described in detail in section 10).
SETUP: access to the SETUP menu (configuration) (function described in detail in sections 02 and 10) Long press: GPS coverage.
3 Audio settings (Balance/Fader, Bass/Treble, Musical Ambience...).
4 Volume adjustment. Short press: mute.
5 Automatic search for a radio station on a lower frequency. Selection of the previous CD or MP3 track
6 Automatic search for a radio station on a higher frequency. Selection of the next CD or MP3 track
- Normal display or black screen.
- Selection of the successive displaying on the screen of MAP/NAV (if navigation is in progress)/TEL (if a conversation is in progress)/RADIO or MEDIA currently being played.
- PICK UP: access to the TELEPHONE menu. With Bluetooth connection, accept an incoming call.
- HANG UP: access to the TELEPHONE menu. Hang up the current call or refuse an incoming call, with Bluetooth connection access to the TELEPHONE menu
- Telephone numeric keypad, pre-selection of 10 radio frequencies.
- SD card reader.
FIRST STEPS 01
NaviDrive 3D NAVIGATO
1: OK: confirmation of the over-bright item on the screen
- 4-direction navigator: press to the left/right:
When the RADIO screen is displayed: selection of the previous/next frequency
When MEDIA is displayed: selection of the previous/next track
When MAP or NAV is displayed: horizontal movement of the map.
- 4-direction navigator: press up/down.
When RADIO is displayed: selection of the previous/next radio station on the list
When the MEDIA screen is displayed: selection of the previous/next MP3 directory or CD
When MAP or NAV is displayed: vertical movement of the map
Switch to the next or previous page of a menu.
14 Rotation of the ring:
When the RADIO screen is displayed: selection of the previous/next radio station on the list
When the MEDIA screen is displayed: selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 track
When MAP or NAV is displayed: front/rear map zoom.
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:
(If a conversation is in progress
FULL SCREEN MA
NAVIGATIO
(If navigation is in progress
SETUP:
Access to the SETUP menu: system language a voice functions, voice initialisation (section 09), date time, display, unit and system parametc Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to th demonstration mode
For maintenance of the display, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product
TRAFFIC
access to the traffic menu: displaying of the current traffic alerts
MEDIA
Audio DVD menu Video DVD meni
For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Displ flow charts" section of this handbook
GENERAL OPERATION 02 DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEX
Pressing OK permits access to short-c menus according to the display on the screen.
NA1
ABORT GUIDANC
REPEAT ADVIC
BLOCK ROA
CANCEL
LENGTHEN DIV
SHORTEN DIV
RECALCULATI
ZOOM/SCROLI
TRAVEL ROUTI
ROUTE INF
SHOW DEST
TRIP INFO
route typ
avoidance criteri:
satellite:
stages info
TRAVEL ROUTE
ZOOM/SCROLI
VOICE ADVIC
ROUTE OPTION
TEL
END CAL
HOLD CAL
DIA
DTMF TONE
PRIVATE MOD
MICRO OF
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
1.
PLAY OPTION
NORMAL
RANDOM TRACK
TRACK INFC
SELECT MUSI
RADIC
IN FM MOD
TA
RDS
RADIOTEX
REGIONAL PROG. (REG
AN
IN AM MOD
TA
REFRESH AM LIS
FN
02 GENERAL OPERATION DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEX
MAF
ABORT/RESUME GUIDANC
SET DESTINATION/ADD STAC
POIS NEARB
POSITION INF
OPTION
guide to
dia
store position
zoom/scrol
MAP SETTING
2D MAF
PERSPECTIVI
3D MAF
MAP ORIENT. NORT
MAP ORIENT. VEHICL
ZOOM/SCROL
AUDIO DVE
STO
GROU
group 1.2/1
PLAY MOD
normal/random track/intr
TA
SELECT MUSIC
VIDEO DVC
PLA
STO
DVD men
main men
lists of title
chapters
DVD OPTION
audic
subtitle:
angles
Exampl
The NAVIGATION voice commands are listed in section C
During guidance, a long press on the end of the lights stalk repeats the last guidan instruction
1
Press the NAV buttor
4
Select the NEW DESTINATION INPUT function and press OK to confirm
NEW DESTINATION INPUT
The image contains a graphical symbol resembling a light bulb or a sun, with no text or numerical data present. Therefore, no OCR output can be generated.
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under thNAVIGATION MENU function
5
Once the country has been selected turn the ring and select the tow function. Press OK to confirm
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function an press OK to confirm
NAVIGATION MENU
6
Select the letters of the town one t one confi rming each time by pressin OK.
3
Select the DESTINATION INPU function and press OK to confirm
DESTINATION INPUT
A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST butto on the virtual keypad.
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
ROUTE OPTION
When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "map settings" then "flat map/map in perspective/3D map/North orientation/vehicle orientation". The displaying of buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress of the town mapping.
1
Press the NAV buttor
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function an press OK to confirm
NAVIGATION MENU
3
Select the ROUTE OPTIONS functio and press OK to confi rn
ROUTE OPTIONS
4
Select the ROUTE TYPE function an press OK to confirm. This function allows you to change the route type
ROUTE TYPE
5
Select the ROUTE DYNAMIC function.
This function provides access to the TRAFFIC INDEPENDENT, SEMI DYNAMIC and AUTOMATIC options
ROUTE DYNAMICS
6
Select the AVOIDANCE CRITERI function. This function provides access to the AVOID option (motorways, toll roads, ferries tunnels).
AVOIDANCE CRITERIA
7
Turn the ring and select th
RECALCULATE function to take int
account the route options selected
Press OK to confirm
RECALCULATE
ADDING A STOPOVE
Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination has been selected.
1
Press the NAV buttor
5
Enter a new address, for example
NEW DESTINATION INPUT
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function and press OK to confirm
NAVIGATION MENU
6
Once the new address has bee entered, select START GUIDANCE and press OK to confirm
START GUIDANCE
3
Select the STOPOVERS function an press OK to confirm
STOPOVERS
7
Position the stopover on the list an press OK to confirm
4
Select the ADD A STOPOVE function (5 stopovers maximum) and press OK to confirm
ADD A STOPOVER
8
Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then sele RECALCULATE and press OK to confi rr
[Non-Text]
To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 at select OPTIMISE ROUTE (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the list) using the ring to change the order, confirm its new position and finish with RECALCULATE
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTERES
The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...)
1
Press the NAV buttor
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function an press OK to confirm
3
Select the SEARCH POINTS O INTEREST function and press OK t confi rm
SEARCH POINTS OF INTEREST
4
Select the POI NEARBY function 1 search for POIs around the vehicle
5
Select the POI NEAR DESTINATION function to search for POIs near the point of arrival of the route
POI NEAR DESTINATION
6
Select the POI IN CITY function I search for POIs in the city required. Select the country then enter the name of the city using the virtual keypad.
POI IN CITY
A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad
7
Select the POI IN COUNTRY functic to search for POIs in the country required
POI IN COUNTRY
8
Select the POI NEAR ROUT function to search for POIs near the route
POI NEAR ROUTE
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
Zooming in on this icon show the new POIs.
List of POIs
Service station
LPG station
Garage
CITROËN
Motor racing circuit
Covered car park
Car park
Rest area
Hotel
Restaurant
Refreshment area
Picnic area
Cafeteria
Airport Railway station Bus station
Port
Industrial estate
Supermarket
Bank
Vending machine
Tennis court
Swimming pool
Golf course
Winter sports resort
Theatre
Cinema Camp site Theme parks
Hospital
Pharmacy Police station
School Post office
Museum Tourist information
Automatic speed camera*
Red light camera*
Hazardous location*
* according to availability in the co
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
UPDATING THE HAZARDOUS LOCATIO POIs
1
Download the HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs upda fi le onto an SD card or USB stick from the Interne This service will be available on www.citroen.f www.citroen.co.uk then gradually deployed to all of the other countries.
2
Insert the medium (SD card or USB stick) containir the POI database into the system's SD card reader of USB reader
3
Press NAV, select NAVIGATIC MENU, then IMPORT POI
NAVIGATION MENU
IMPORT POI
4
Select the medium (USB or SD card used and press OK
5
Successful downloading is confirmed by a message
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTING
1
When the navigation is displayed on the screen, press OK then selects or deselect VOICE MESSAGE to activate or deactivate the speaker guidance instructions Use the volume button to adjust the volume.
POINTS OF INTEREST AND HAZAR LOCATIONS SETTINGS
1
Press the NAV button
2
Press the NAV button again or sele the NAVIGATION MENU function an press OK to confi rn
NAVIGATION MENU
3
Select the SETTINGS function an press OK to confirm
SETTINGS
4
Select the POI CATEGORIES OI MAP function to select the POIs to b displayed on the map by default
POI CATEGORIES ON MAP
5
Select HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs to gain access to the DISPLAY ON MAP, VISUAL ALERT an SOUND ALERT functions
HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIS
04 TRAFFIC INFORMATIC
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AN DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES
1
Press the TRAFFIC buttor
The image contains a graphical symbol resembling a light bulb or a target, with no readable text or mathematical content. Therefore, no OCR output can be generated.
The list of TMC messages appears under the TRAFIC MENU sorted in order of proximity
2
Press the TRAFFIC button again select the TRAFFIC MENU function and press OK to confirm
TRAFFIC MENU
i
The TMC icon, at the bottom left of the screen, may appear in 3 different forms
- No TMC station availab
- TMC station available, no messagen route,
- TMC station available and messag on route (if guidance is active)
3
Select MESSAGE FILTERING an press OK to confirm
4
Select the filter of your choice
MESSAGES ON ROUTE
ALL WARNING MESSAGES
ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTE
ALL MESSAGES
The messages appear on the ma and on the list.
5
Select the FILTER BY DISTANC function and press OK to confirm
FILTER BY DISTANCE
6
By selecting an item from the list an confi rming by pressing OK, the ever appears on the map on the left with the detailed description of the even on the right. To exit press ESC
05 RADIC
SELECTING A STATIO
1
Press the RADIO button to display the list of stations received locally sorted in alphabetical order Select the station required by turning the ring and press to confirm
[Non-Text]
While listening to the radio, press button ◀ ▶ for the automatic search for a lower or higher frequency
[Non-Text]
When the RADIO screen is displayed, turn the ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the previous or next station on the list
#
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than 2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confirms that it has been stored Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall thstored radio station.
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure or the audio equipment
RDS - REGIONAL MODE - TRAFFIC INFO
1
When the current radio station i displayed on the screen, press OK
2
The radio source short-cuts menu appears and proves access to the following short-cuts
TA
RDS
RADIOTEXT
Select the function required and pres OK to confirm to gain access to the corresponding settings
[Non-Text]
The RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same station by means of the frequency following. However, in certain conditions, this RDS station cannot be followed throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a urney.
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1,2 & 2. Audio Layer 3 and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRV when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly
It is recommended that the same recording standards always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possibl (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joli standard is recommended
The audio equipment will only play audio files with the extension ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbp and the extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps. It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mod No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be play€
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.
During play, exit the SD Card or USB source before: moving the SD card or the USB stick from its reade
To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open
SELECTING/PLAYIN CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/USB READ
MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible source
1
Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the play the SD card in the card reader or the USB peripheral in the USB reader. Play begin automatically
!
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under MUSIC MENU.
2
Press this button
3
When the MEDIA screen is displayed turn the ring up or down to select the previous or next compatible source
4
Press the MEDIA button
5
Press the MEDIA button again (select the MEDIA MENU function and press OK to confirm
MEDIA MENU
6
Select the SELECT MUSIC functio and press OK to confi rr
SELECT MUSIC
7
Select the music source required Press OK to confirm. Play begins
!
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used. We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard
Insert the DVD in the player. Pla begins automatically
2
If the DVD does not appear on the screen, press the MODE button to gain access to the MEDIA screen which displays the DVD screen
3
Press the MEDIA button to gai access to the DVD Menu at any time or to the functions of the MEDIA Menu which adjust the video (brightness contrast, image format...)
#
The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow yc to move the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressin the ▶ or ◀ button.
!
Select the video source required (Video DVD, Auxiliy video input). Press OK to confirm. Play begin:
USING THE EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX) AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
1
Connect the portable equipment (MP3 player, camcider, camera...) to the RCA socket (white and red for audio, red and yellow for video) in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable
2
Press the MEDIA button then press it again or select the MEDIA MENU function and press OK to confirm
!
If the external device is not activated, select EXTERAL DEVICE MANAGEMENT to activate it
3
Select CHOOSE SOURCE the EXTERNAL DEVICE (video) and press OK to activate it
EXTERNAL DEVICE
4
Select the AUX music source an press OK to confirm. Play begin automatically
!
The displaying and management of the controls are perated via the portable equipment
JUKEBO COPYING A CD, A USB STICK OR AN SD CARD ONTO THE HARD DISC
1
Insert an audio/MP3 CD, a USB stick or an SD card
!
Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the mlium used (CD, USB or SD card)
2
Press the MEDIA button. Press the MEDIA button again or select MEDIA MENU and press OK to confirm
3
Select JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT then COPY and press OK at each step to confirm
COPY
4
Select COPY FROM
COPY FROM
5
Select the tracks required then COP SELECTION or select all of the tracks using COPY ALL
6
Select NEW FOLDER to create new folder or select an existing folder (created previously)
NEW FOLDER
7
ENTER FILE NAMES: select YES t change them or NO
YES
NO
8
To copy an MP3 CD, then select COPY WHILE LISTENING, FAST COPY/HIGH QUALITY (192 kBit/s) of NORMAL QUALITY (128 kBit/s) the select START COPY
9
Confir rm the warning message t pressing OK to start the copy
OK
JUKEBO》 RENAMING AN ALBUI
Press the MEDIA button
2
Press the MEDIA button again (select MEDIA MENU and press O) to confirm
3
Select the JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT function and press OK to confirm
4
Select DELETE/RENAME and pres OK confi rm
JUKEBOX
1
Press the MEDIA buttor Press the MEDIA button again (select MEDIA MENU and press Off to confirm
!
Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able to rename or delete a track/directory
2
Select JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT and press OK to confirm
3
Select PLAY MODE and press OK 1 confi rm Select FOLDERS AND FILES c PLAYLIST then press OK to confi rr
[Non-Text]
Press the ESC button to return to the first file lev Playlists can be created in the Jukebo: MEDIA menu>Jukebox Management>Create playlist. Add the trace required one by one then save the change. The Playlist play moc must then be selected
07 MAKING A TELEPHONE CALI
CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOT TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE
1
To activate the Bluetooth telephor or the internal telephone, press PICK UP TEL.
2
Select TELEPHONE MENU, the SELECT TELEPHONE then choose between NONE, BLUETOOTH TFI EPHONE or INTERNAL TELEPHONE. Press OK at each step to confirm
!
The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time. In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth telephone.
07 MAKING A TELEPHONE CALI
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTI TELEPHONE
!
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the NaviDrive3D must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition.
1
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function The last telephone connected is reconnecte automatically
2
Press the TEL button
3
If no telephone is connected, the system prompts you to CONNECT PHONE. Select YES and press OK to confirm
#
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maxium) appears on the multifunction display. Select the telephone required then select CONNECT PHONE for a new connection. Select DELETE PHONE to cancel the connection to the telephone
The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from dealers.
4
For a first connection, sele SEARCH PHONE and press OK to confirm. Then select the name of the telephone.
SEARCH PHONE
5
Enter the authentication code on the telephone. The code to be entered i displayed on the screen
i
Once the telephone has been connected, the NaviDre 3D can synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes
1
To change the telephone connected press the TEL button, then select TELEPHONE MENU, ther SELECT PHONE then CONNECT BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE ther select the telephone required o SEARCH PHONE. Press OK at each step to confi rr
07 MAKING A TELEPHONE CA
USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHON WITH SIM CARD
If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's audio system
1
Extract the holder by pressing the eject butto
1
Enter the PIN code on the keypa then select OK and confirm
PIN CODE
2
Install the SIM card in the holde and then insert it in the slot
#
When entering your PIN code, tick the STORE PIN tab to ga access to the telephone without having to enter this code when it used subsequently
2
The system asks USE INTERNA TELEPHONE FOR VOICE CALLS select YES if you wish to use you SIM card for your personal calls Otherwise, only the emergency ca and the services will use the SIM card.
3
To remove the SIM card, repeat step
!
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must be carried out when stationary
The image contains a graphical symbol of a light bulb, which is not standard alphanumeric text. According to the instructions, non-text figures/diagrams are to be ignored. Therefore, no OCR output is generated.
Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise the address book and the call list This synchronisation may take a few minutes.
RECEIVING A CAL
1
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a supenposed display on the screen.
2
Select the YES tab to accept or NO I refuse and confirm by pressing OI
YES
NO
#
The PICK UP TEL button accepts, the HANG UP TEL button refus the incoming call.
3
To hang up, press the HANG UP TE button or press OK and select ENI CALL then confirm by pressing O
HANG UP TEL
#
Press the end of the steering wheel control I accept the call or end the call in progress
MAKING A CAL
1
Press the PICK UP TEL buttor
#
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle appears under TELEPHONE MENU. You can select a number and press OK to make the call
2
Select the TELEPHONE MENI function and press OK to confirm
TELEPHONE MENU
3
Select DIAL NUMBER, then dial the telephone number using the virtual keypad.
DIAL NUMBER
#
It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You can select DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOOK. The NaviDrive3D permits the recording of up to 4 096 entries
[Non-Text]
Press the end of the steering wheel control for more than two seconds to gain access to the address book
warning, the emergency call and the services are only active if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not operational
EMERGENCY CAL EXCEPT NaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL
CONSULTING THE SERVI
In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audib signal is heard and a CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATIO screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted A call is made to the emergency services (112 In certain countries *, this emergency call is made directed by the CITROËN Emergency team which locates the vehicle and alerts the appropriate emergency services are quickly as possible
If necessary, the internal telephone is activated autoatically to make an emergency call
* On condition that the CITROEN Emergency contract has been sig. This is free and of unlimited duration. Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Press this button to gain access to the CITROË services *
Select CUSTOMER CONTAC CENTRE to request any information about the CITROËN marque
CUSTOMER CONTACT CENTRE
Select CITROËN ASSISTANCE 1 make a breakdown assistance call
CITROËN ASSISTANCE
* These services and options are subject to conditions and availability.
08 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIM
1
Press the SET UP button
2
Select the DATE AND TIME functic and press OK to confirm
DATE AND TIME
3
Select the SET DATE AND TIM function and press OK to confirm
SET DATE AND TIME
4
Set the parameters using the ring an move on to the next by moving the 4-direction navigator Press OK to confirm
This function provides access to the options according to the SETUP flow cha
Principle of the GPS synchrc
-
Confirm the "GPS synchro" selection, the time is then set to GMT universal time, the date is also updated
-
Using the 4-direction navigator, move to the time fi elds and press
-
You can then use the ring to set the time to the time zone of your chc
Take care when changing between summer/winter time, the time zone must be changed again manually
5
Select the DATE FORMAT functic and press OK to confi rn Select the format required using th ring and press OK to confi rn
6
Select the TIME FORMAT functic and press OK to confi rn Select the format required using th ring and press OK to confi rn
#
Pressing the SET UP button for more than 2 secondpermits access to:
DESCRIPTION OF THE UNIT
GPS COVERAGE
DEMO MODE
09 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING WHEEL CONTROL
C5 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL
Successive presses: "Black Panel" mode - black screen (night driving)
Short press to make a telephone call. Pick up/Hang up. Access the telephone menu. Display the call list. Long press to reject an incoming call.
Long press: update the list of station received Short press: activate the voice recognitio Long press: repeat the current navigatic instruction
Successive presses: provides access to the Radio and Media screen according to the current display
3 Rotation: provides access to the short-cut menus according to the display on the screen. Short press: confirm the choice displayed on screen. Long press: return to the main menu.
4 Short press: abandon the current operation. Reject an incoming telephone call. Long press: return to the initial display.
Menu: provides access to the main menu.
t VOL +: volume increase.
- VOL : volume decrease.
{ Successive presses: mute/restore sound.
\$ Short press: Radio: higher frequency.
Music players: next track.
Long press for fast play.
11 Short press: Radio: lower frequency. Music players: previous track. Long press for fast play.
1. Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or the list of tracks, albums, directories.
VOICE COMMANDS VOICE RECO. INITIATION
1
Before using the system for the first time, you are advised to listen to, say and repeat the instructions for use
2
Press the SETUP button an select the LANGUAGES AND VOICE FUNCTIONS function Turn the ring and select VOICI RECO. PARAMETERS. Activate the voice recognition Select INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE.
#
The phrases to be spoken according to the environment the level 1 selection are indicated in level 2 Speak and NaviDrive 3D acts
#
Long press: activates the voice recognition
| LEVEL | LEVEL | ACTION |
| VOICE COMMAN | USE OF THE COMMAN | |
| GENERA | Help address booHelp voice controHelp mediaHelp navigationHelp telephoneHelp radicCanceCorrection | Access to the address book helAccess to the voice reco helAccess to the media management helAccess to the guidance, navigation helAccess to the telephone helAccess to the radio helTo cancel a voice command which is in progresRequest to correct the last voice recogniticcarried outClea |
| RADIO | Select statioStationfrom the RADIO lisRead out station lisEnter frequencySelect wave banAlvFMATA oTA of | Select a radio stationSelect a radio station using its RDS descripticfrom the RADIO lisListen to the list of stations availablListen to the frequency of the current radio staticChoose the frequency waveband (AM or FIChange the frequency waveband to AIChange the frequency waveband to FIActivate the Traffic Info (TDeactivate the Traffic In |
| NAVIGATIO | Destination InpiVoice advice ofVoice advice orSave addressStart guidancAbort guidancNavigate entryPOI Search | Command to enter a new destination addresDeactivate the spoken guidance instructorActivate the spoken guidance instructorSave an address in the address bocStart guidance (once the address has beentered)Stop guidancStart guidance to a file in the address boStart guidance to a point of intere |
VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE RECO. INITIATION
| LEVEL | LEVEL | ACTION |
| VOICE COMMANI | USE OF THE COMMAN | |
| MEDI. | MediSelect mediaSingle slotJukebo:USEExternal devioChangeSD-carTrack <1 - 1 000Disc <1 - 62Folder <1 - 1 000 | Select the MEDIA sourcChoose a sourcSelect the CD player sourcSelect the Jukebox sourcSelect the USB reader sourcSelect the audio AUX input sourcSelect the CD changer sourcSelect the SD card sourcSelect a specifi c track (number between 1 a 1 000) on the active MEDIUMSelect a CD (number between 1 and 6) in the C changer to be activatedSelect a Folder (number between 1 and 1 000 on the active MEDIUM |
| TELEPHON | Phone menEnter numberPhone bookDiaSave numbAcceptReject | Open the Telephone MerEnter a telephone number to be calleOpen the phone boolMake a calSave a number in the phone bocAccept an incoming caRefuse an incoming ca |
| ADDRESS BOOK | Address book menCall | Open the address booCall fi le using its descriptionas descrit In the address bokStart guidance to an address in the address boc using its description |
| Navigate |
10 DISPLAY FLOW CHARTS
1 MAIN FUNCTIO
2 CHOICE
3 choice A'
3 choice A
2 CHOICE B.
"TRAFFIC" MEN
MESSAGE FILTERIN
all messages on rou
warning messages on rout
warning messages on
all types of messag
fi Iter by distan
deactivate
within a radius of 2 miles (3 kn
within a radius of 3 miles (5 kn
within a radius of 6 miles (10 kn
within a radius of 30 miles (50 km
READING OF MESSAGE
on consultation of the messag
on reception of the messag
TMC STATIONS INFORMATIC
"MEDIA" MEN
SELECT SOURC
audio CD/MP3 CD/audio DVD/video DV
CD change
jukebo
SD car
US
external device (audio/video)
JUKEBOX MANAGEMEN
cop
create fold
delete/renan
edit playlists
play mod
folders & fi le
Playlis
memory statu
AUDIO SETTING
refer to the "AUDIO SETTINGS" menu
VIDEO SETTING
display form:
language
display setting
brightness:
contras
colour:
video standard (AU)
initialise video setting
EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX) MANAGEMENT
off/audio/audio and video
"RADIO" MEN
AM/FM WAVEBAN
FM waveban
AM waveban
SELECT FREQUENCY
AUDIO SETTING:
refer to the "AUDIO SETTINGS" menu
"AUDIO SETTINGS" MEN
BALANCE/FADE
BASS/TREBL
MUSICAL AMBIENC
non
classica
jaz
rock/po
techni
VOCI
CUT OUT REAR SPEAKER
LOUDNES
AUTO VOLUME CORRECTIO
INITIALISE AUDIO SETTING
"NAVIGATION" MEN
STOP/RESUME GUIDANC
ENTER DESTINATION
enter new addres
countr
towi
roa
numbe
start guidanc
post cod
add to address boo
junction
town centr
GPS coordinate
entering on ma
guide me hom
from last destination
from address boc
STOPOVER
add stopove
enter new addres
guide me hom
from address bool
from last destination
optimise rout
replace stopovo
delete stopove
recalculat
fast rout
short route
optimised route
SEARCH FOR POINTS OF INTERES
nearb
near destinatio
in a tow
in a count
along the rout
GUIDANCE OPTION
guidance criteri
near destination
short route
4 optimised route
4 chargeable servic
2 SETTING
route dynamic
4 tratti c independe
4 semi-dynami
4 automati
3 avoidance criteria
4 avoid motorway
4 avoid toll
4 avoid tunnel:
4 avoid ferrie:
3 recalculate
NO.01
"ADDRESS BOOK" MEN
CREATE NEW FIL
DISPLAY AVAILABLE SPAC
EXPORT ADDRESS BOO
CLEAR ALL VOICE DESCRIPTION
DELETE ALL FILE
CLEAR CONTENT OF "MY ADDRESSES"
"TELEPHONE" MEN
2 DIA
CALL FROM ADDRESS BOO
CALL LIS
MESSAGE:
2 SELECT TELEPHON
3 non
3 bluetooth telephon
3 internal telephon
3 connect bluetooth telephon
4 search phone
5 disconnect phone
5 rename phone
5 delete phone
5 delete all phones
5 display details
2 SETTING:
3 automatic voice ma
3 call signs
select ring ton
set ring volum
enter message service numbe
3 internal telephone setting
PIN setting
network selectio
SIM card memory status
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the NaviDrive 3D.
| QUESTION | RESPONSE | SOLUTION |
| There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD, CE changer...). | For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treb Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound source which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CI CD changer...) | Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bas Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted t the sources listened to. It is advisable to se the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rea Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middl position, select the musical ambience "None and set the loudness correction to the "Active position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" positio in radio mode |
| The CD is ejecte automatically or is no played by the player | The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any auc data or contains an audio format which the player cannot plaThe CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is r recognised by the audio equipmen | - Check that the CD is inserted in the player right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD canr be played if it is too damaged- Check the content in the case of a record CD: consult the advice in the Audio sectior- The audio equipment's CD player does r play DVDs.- Due to inadequate quality, certain record CDs will not be played by the audio systerr- The CD changer does not play MP3 CD |
| The CD player soun is poor | The CD used is scratched or of poor qualit | Insert good quality CDs and store them i suitable conditions. |
| The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitab | Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selectir an ambience. | |
| The stored stations do not function (no sound 87.5 Mhz is displayed... | An incorrect waveband is selected | Press RADIO, select RADIO MENU then AM/FI WAVEBAND to return to the waveband on which the stations are stored |
| The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorated or the stored stations do not function (no sound 87.5 Mhz is displayed...) | The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehic is travelling. | Activate the RDS function by means of the shot cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area |
| The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) blo reception, including in RDS mode | This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment | |
| The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when goir through a car wash or into an underground car park. | Have the aerial checked by a CITROEN deals | |
| Sound cut-outs of to 2 seconds in radic mode. | During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequent permitting better reception of the statior | Deactivate the RDS function by means of tr short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequer and always on the same route |
| With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use | When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the battery chargeThe switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode ar switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's batter. | Start the vehicle's engine to increase the batte charge. |
| The TRAFFIC INFC box is ticked. However certain traffi c jam along the route are no indicated in real time | On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive tl traffi c information | Wait until the traffi c information is being receiv correctly (displaying of the traffi c informatic symbols on the map) |
| In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, ...) are listed for tl traffi c information | This phenomenon is normal. The system dependent on the traffi c information availabl | |
| The time taken to calculate a route sometimes seems longer than usual | The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/Dv is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is beir calculated. | Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stc the copying before starting the guidance function |
| Does the emergency ca function work without a SIM card? | No, European regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in order make an emergency call | Insert a valid SIM card in the slo |
| The altitude is nc displayed. | On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes receive more than 4 satellites correctly | Wait until the system has started up completel Check that there is a GPS coverage of at leas 4 satellites (long press on the SETUP buttor then select GPS COVERAGE) |
| Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel, ...) or the weather the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may var. | This phenomenon is normal. The system dependent on the conditions of reception of th GPS signal. | |
| The route calculation i not successful | The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion toll roads on a toll motorway) | Check the exclusion criteria on the NAV mer (GUIDANCE OPTION-EXCLUSION CRITERIA) |
| QUESTIO | RESPONSE | SOLUTION |
| There is a long waitir period following the inserti of a CD or SD carr | When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few second | This phenomenon is norma |
| I cannot connect m Bluetooth telephone | The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipme may not be visible | - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth funct is switched on- Check that your telephone is visib |
| The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the syster | A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephone is available from the dealer network | |
| The system does nc play the DVD | The region protection may not be compatible | Insert DVDs which have compatible regio protection |
| I cannot copy the CD t the Jukebox. | The wrong source is selectec | Change the active source to CI |
| The CD is copy-protectec | It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copie | |
| The system does nc receive SMS. | The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the syster | Use your SIM card and the internal telephone |
| The SIM card used is a twin carc | Use the original SIM card to receive the SM: |
MyWay
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH TELEPHON
GPS EUROPE BY SD CAR
The MyWay is protected in such a way that it will operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for configuration the system.
For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary
When the engine is switched off and to preve discharging of the battery, the MyWay switches c following the activation of the Energy Economy mode
Certain functions described in this handbook will become available during the course of the year
CONTENTS
• 01 First steps pg. 2
• 02 General operation pg. 4
• 03 Navigation - Guidance pg. 6
• 04 Traffic information pg. 13
• 05 Radio pg. 14
• 06 Music media players pg. 15
• 07 Bluetooth telephone pg. 18
• 08 Configuration pg
● 09 Steering wheel controls pg. 22
• 10 Display flow charts pg. 24
- Frequently asked questions central pgs.
01 FIRST STEPS
MY WAY CONTROL PANE
natural_image
Circular diagram with concentric rings and two horizontal bars, no text or symbols presentFIRST STEPS 01
MY WAY CONTROL PANE
On/Off
CD/SD card pause, mute for the radio.
Long press: reinitialisation of the system.
Volume adjustment.
: Access to the RADIO menu. Displaying of the list of stations.
Access to the MUSIC menu. Displaying of the tracks.
3 - Long press: access to the settings: front/rear and left/rig balance, bass/treble, equalizer, loudness, automatic volum adjustment, initialise the settings
! Access to the SETUP menu.
Long press: access to the GPS coverage and the demonstration mode.
Access to the PHONE menu. Displaying of the call list.
Access to the MODE menu.
Selection of the successive displaying of:
Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation is in progress), Telephone
(if a conversation is in progress), Trip Compute
Long press: displaying of a black screen (DARK).
Access to the NAVIGATION menu. Displaying of the last destinations
Access to the TRAFFIC menu. Displaying of the current traffic alerts.
11 ESC: abandon the operation in progress.
1 CD eject.
12 Selection of the previous/next radio station from the list
Selection of the previous/next CD.
Selection of the previous/next MP3 directory.
Selection of the previous/next page of a list.
13 Selection of the previous/next radio station. Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 track. Selection of the previous/next line of a list.
14 Buttons 1 to 6
Selection of the stored radio station
Selection of the CD in the CD changer.
Long press: storing of the current radio station
15 SD card reader.
16 Dial for selection on the display on the screen and according to the context of the men. Short press: confirmation.
Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following men
RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER
(If a conversation is in progress
TRIP COMPUTE
FULL SCREEN MAF
NAVIGATIO
(If navigation is in progress
SETUP
system language, date and time, display vehicle parameters, units and system parameters DEMONSTRATION MODE
TRAFFIC
TMC information and messages
For maintenance of the display, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product
For a detailed global view of the menus available refer to section 10.
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEX
A press on the OK dial to permits access to short-cut menus according to the display on the screen
NA1
ABORT GUIDANC
REPEAT ADVIC
BLOCK ROA
ROUTE INF
show dest
trip info
route typ
avoidance criteria
satellite:
zoom/scroll
VOICE ADVIC
ROUTE OPTION
TRIP COMPUTER
ALERT LO
STATUS OF FUNCTION
PHONE
END CAL
HOLD CAL
DIA
DTMF TONE
PRIVATE MOD
MICRO OF
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
T,
PLAY OPTION
norma
random trac
repeat folde
track intro
SELECT MUSI
RADIC
IN FM MOD
RDS
radiotex
regional prog. (REG
AN
IN AM MOD
refresh AM lis
FN
MAP:
ABORT/RESUME GUIDANC
SET DESTINATION
POIS NEARB
POSITION INF
MAP SETTING
ZOOM/SCROLL
Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use the Navigation functions.
The navigation SD card data must not be change
The map data updates are available from CITROEN dealer
1
Press the NAV buttor
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the NAVIGATION MENU function
4
Select the NEW DESTINATION INPUT function and press the dial to confirm
5
Once the country has been selected turn the dial and select the town function. Press the dial to confirm
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function an press the dial to confirm
NAVIGATION MENI
3
DESTINATION INPUT
Select the DESTINATION INPU function and press the dial to confirm
6
Select the letters of the town one t one confi rming each time by pressin the dial.
A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST butto on the virtual keypad.
The route selected by the MyWay audio/telephone depends directly on the route option. Changing these options may change the route complete
1
Press the NAV buttor
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function an press the dial to confirm
NAVIGATION MENU
3
Select the ROUTE OPTIONS functio and press the dial to confi rn
ROUTE OPTIONS
4
Select the ROUTE TYPE function an press the dial to confi rm. This functic allows you to change the route type
ROUTE TYPE
5
Select the ROUTE DYNAMIC: function.
This function provides access to the TRAFFIC INDEPENDENT or SEMI DYNAMIC options
ROUTE DYNAMICS
6
Select the AVOIDANCE CRITERI function. This function provides access to the AVOID option (motorways, toll roads, ferries)
AVOIDANCE CRITERIA
7
Turn the dial and select th RECALCULATE function to take int account the route options selected Press the dial to confi rr
RECALCULATE
ADDING A STOPOVE
Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been select
1
Press the NAV buttor
5
Enter a new address, for example
ENTER A NEW ADDRESS
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function and press the dial to confirm
NAVIGATION MENU
6
Once the new address has bee entered, select OK and press the dia to confi rr
OK
3
Select the STOPOVERS function an press the dial to confi rm
STOPOVERS
7
Select RECALCULATE and press th dial to confi rm
RECALCULATE
4
Select the ADD A STOPOVE function (5 stopovers maximum) and press the dial to confirm
ADD A STOPOVER
The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the guidance to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, MyWa will always return you to the previous stopover
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTERES
The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...)
1
Press the NAV buttor
2
Press the NAV button again or select the NAVIGATION MENU function and press the dial to confirm
NAVIGATION MENU
3
Select the SEARCH POINTS O INTEREST function and press the dial to confirm
SEARCH POINTS OF INTEREST
4
Select the POI NEARBY function 1 search for POIs around the vehicle
POI NEARBY
5
Select the POI NEAR DESTINATION function to search for POIs near the point of arrival of the route
POI NEAR DESTINATION
6
Select the POI IN CITY function I search for POIs in the city required. Select the country then enter the name of the city using the virtual keypad.
POI IN CITY
[Non-Text]
A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual keypad
7
Select the POI IN COUNTRY functic to search for POIs in the country required
POI IN COUNTRY
8
Select the POI NEAR ROUT function to search for POIs near the route
POI NEAR ROUTE
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
Zooming in on this 100 shows the new POIs
List of POI
* according to availability in the cou
03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
NAVIGATION SETTING
Contact a CITROËN dealer for details of the procedure for obtaining the HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs. The updating of the HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible reader.
1
Press the NAV button
4
Select the NAVI VOLUME functio and turn the dial to set the volume of each voice synthesiser (traffi information, alert messages...)
NAVI VOLUME
2
Press the NAV button again or sele the NAVIGATION MENU function an press the dial to confi rn
NAVIGATION MENU
5
Select the POI CATEGORIES OI MAP function to select the POIs to b displayed on the map by default
POI CATEGORIES ON MAP
3
Select the SETTINGS function an press the dial to confi rn
SETTINGS
6
Select HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs to gain access to the DISPLAY ON MAP, VISUAL ALERT an SOUND ALERT functions
HAZARDOUS LOCATION POI:
04 TRAFFIC INFORMATIO
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AN DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES
1
Press the TRAFFIC buttor
The list of TMC messages appears under the TRAFFIC MENU sorted in order of proximity
2
Press the TRAFFIC button again select the TRAFFIC MENU function and press the dial to confirm
TRAFFIC MENU
i
The TMC icon, at the bottom left of the screen, may appear in 3 different forms
No TMC station availab
- TMC station available, no message on route,
- TMC station available and messages on route (if guidance is active)
The filters are independent and their results are cumulative
We recommend a filter on the route and a filter around the vehicle
- 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy tra
- 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal trafi
- 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorwa
3
Select the filter of your choic
MESSAGES ON ROUTE
ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTI
ALL WARNING MESSAGES
ALL MESSAGES
The messages appear on the ma and on the list. To exit, press ESC
4
Select the GEOGRAPHICAL FILTER (NONE) function and press the dial to confirm
GEOGRAPHICAL FILTER (NONE)
5
On the list which appears, select the distance radius required ir accordance with the route Press the dial to confirm the selectic
05 RADIC
SELECTING A STATIO
1
Press the RADIO button to display the list of stations received locally sorted in alphabetical order Select the station required by turning the dial and press to confirm
While listening to the radio, press one of the buttons to select the previous or next station of the list
A long press of one of the buttons starts it automatic search for a station with a lower c higher frequency
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than 2 seconds to store the current station Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio station.
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RUS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
RDS - REGIONAL MODE - TRAFFIC INFO
1
When the current radio station i displayed on the screen, press the dial.
2
The radio source short-cuts menu appears and proves access to the following short-cuts
TA
RDS
RADIOTEXT
REGIONAL PROG. (REG
WAVEBANC
3
Select the function required and pres the dial to confirm to gain access | the corresponding settings
[Non-Text]
The RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same station by means of the frequency following. However, in certain conditions, this RDS station cannot be followed throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the tritory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
If the GPS is used, the navigation SD card must remain in the MyWay audio/telephone reader. In this case, it is not possible to play an SD card containing MP3 fi I
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1,2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRV when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended
The audio equipment will only play audio files with the extension ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps. It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mod No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be play
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.
During play, exit the SD Card mode before removing the SD card from its reader
To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card where you leave your vehicle with the roof down
SELECTING/PLAYING MUSI CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD
1
Press the MUSIC buttor
!
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under MUSIC MENU.
2
Press the MUSIC button again o select the MUSIC MENU function and press the dial to confirm
MUSIC MENU
3
Select the SELECT MUSIC functio and press the dial to confi rr
SELECT MUSIC
4
Select the music source required CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WM/ SD CARD... Press the dial to confirm Play begins
5
Press the up or down button to select the next/previous folder
6
Press one of the buttons to select music track Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind play
The image contains a graphical symbol resembling a light bulb with radiating lines, accompanied by no textual content. Therefore, no OCR text can be generated from this image.
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used. We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.
PLAYING A CD (NOT MP3/WMA COMPATIBLE
1
Connect the portable equipment (MP3/WMA player...) to the audio sockets (white and red, RCA type) in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable
2
Press the MUSIC button then pres it again or select the MUSIC MEN function and press the dial to confi rn
3
Select the EXTERNAL DEVIC function and press the dial to activate
EXTERNAL DEVICE
4
Select the AUX music source an press the dial to confirm. Play begin automatically
!
The displaying and management of the controls are operated via the portable equipment
1
Insert one or more CDs in th changer. Press the MUSIC button
2
Press the MUSIC button again c select the MUSIC MENU function and press the dial to confirm
MUSIC MENU
3
Select the SELECT MUSIC function and press the dial to confirm
SELECT MUSIC
4
Select the CD CHANGER musi source and press the dial to confi rn
CD CHANGER
5
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad to select the corresponding CD
07 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
CONNECTING A TELEPHON
!
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the MyWay mist be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition or
1
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function The last telephone connected is reconnecte automatically
2
Press the PHONE buttor
3
Select the TELEPHONE MENI function and press the dial to confirm
TELEPHONE MENU
#
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears on the multifunction display. Select the telephone required for a new connection.
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from dealers.
4
For a first connection, sele SEARCH PHONE and press the dia to confirm. Then select the name of the telephone.
SEARCH PHONE
5
Enter the authentication code on the telephone. The code to be entered i displayed on the screen
i
Once the telephone has been connected, MyWay ce synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes.
1
To change the telephone connected press the PHONE button, then select TELEPHONE MENU and press the dial to confirm
2
Select CONNECT PHONE. Select the telephone and press to confirm
CONNECT PHONE
RECEIVING A CAL
1
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display on the multifunction display
2
Select the YES tab to accept or No to refuse and confirm by pressing th dial.
YES
NO
3
To hang up, press the PHONE butto or press the dial and select ENC CALL then confirm by pressing th dial.
END CALL
#
Press the end of the steering wheel control I accept the call or end the call in progress
MAKING A CAL
1
Press the PHONE button
#
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in theehide appears under TELEPHONE MENU. You can select a number and press the dial to make the call
2
Select the TELEPHONE MENI function and press the dial to confi rn
TELEPHONE MENU
3
Select DIAL NUMBER, then dial the telephone number using the virtua keypad.
DIAL NUMBER
[Non-Text]
It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You can select DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOOK. MyWay permits the recording of up to 4 000 entries
[Non-Text]
Press the end of the steering wheel control for more than two seconds to gain access to the address boo
08 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIM
This function provides access to the options: SYSTEM LANGUAGE, DATE AND TIME DISPLAY (BRIGHTNESS, COLOUR, MAP COLOUR), VEHICLE PARAMETERS, UNIT SYSTEM PARAMETERS
1
Press the SET UP button
2
Select the DATE AND TIME functic and press the dial to confirm
DATE AND TIME
3
Select the SET DATE AND TIM function and press the dial to confirm
SET DATE AND TIME
4
Set the parameters one by one using the direction arrows and confirm means of the dial
5
Select the DATE FORMAT functic and press the dial to confirm
6
Confir rm the format required usir the dial.
Select the TIME FORMAT function and press the dial to confirm
Confir rm the format required using the di Pressing the SET UP button for more than 2 secc permits access to
DESCRIPTION OF THE UNIT
GPS COVERAGE
DEMO MODE
TRIP COMPUTER/VEHICLE PARAMETERS
VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC
A FEW DEFINITION
1
- The "vehicle" ta
The range, the current consumption and the distance remaining - The "1" (route 1) tab wil The average speed, the average consumption and the distance travelled calculated over route "1"
- The "2" (route 2) tab with the sar functions for a second route
[Non-Text]
Each press of the button at the end of the wipers stalk displays the various trip computer data in succession, according to the display.
i
Range: displays the distance which can travelled with the remaining fuel detected in the tank, in relation to the average consumption over the last few miles (kilometres)
This displayed value may vary significantly following a change in the vehicle speed or the relief of the route
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km
If, whilst driving, dashes are displayed continuously in place of the digits, contact a CITROËN dealer
Current consumption only calculated and displayed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Average consumption this is the average quantity of fuel consumed since the last trip computer zero rese
Distance traveller calculated since the last trip computer zero reset.
Distance remaining to the destination calculated with reference to the final destination, entered by the user. If guidance is activated, the navigation system calculates it as a current value
Average speethis is the average speed calculated since the last trip computer zero reset (ignition on.
09 STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
C4 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL
Volume increase.
2. Volume decrease
: Successive presses mute/restore the sound.
4 Rotation - associated with a pop-up. Radio - access the 6 stored stations: higher or previous. Music players: previous/next track.
! Radio: next/previous station. Music players: next track.
Press. Repeat the current spoken navigation instruction.
Short press to make a telephone call. Pick up/Hang up. Access the telephone menu. Display the call list. Long press to reject an incoming call.
- Personalisation Short press to confirm the choice made using the dial. - Rotation. Movement on the call list in the phone book. Personalisation selection.
Short press: provides access to the menu according to the display on the screen
- Successive presses: provides access according to the current display on the screer
MAP/NAV (if navigation is in progress), TEL (if a conversation is in progress), RADIO or MEDIA progress, Trip computer
Long press: switch to black screen - Dark (night driving). Touching a control restores the display.
: ESC: abandon the current operation.
4 Rotation: selects the access to the short-cut menus according to the current display
! Confirms the choice displayed on the screen.
09 STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
C5 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL
Successive presses: "Black Panel" mode - black screen (night driving)
- Short press to make a telephone call. Pick up/Hang up. Access the telephone menu. Display the call list. Long press to reject an incoming call.
Press: repeat the current navigatio instruction
Successive presses: selection of the typ of information present on the screen
- Rotation: provides access to the short-cut menus according to the display on the screen.
Short press: confirm the choice displayed on the screen.
Long press: return to the main menu. - Short press: abandon the current operation. Reject an incoming call. Long press: return to the initial display.
- Menu: provides access to the main menu.
-
VOI + volume increase
-
VOL - volume decrease.
1 Successive presses: mute/restore sound.
Short press: Radio: higher frequency.
Music players: next track.
Long press for last play.
10. Short press: Radio: lower frequency.
Music players: previous track.
Long press for fast play.
11 Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or the list of tracks, albums, directories
Long press: update the list of stations received.
10 DISPLAY FLOW CHARTS
1 MAIN FUNCTIO
2 CHOICE
3 choice A
3 choice A
2 CHOICE B.
"TRAFFIC" MEN
MESSAGES ON ROUT
ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUT
ALL WARNING MESSAGE:
ALL MESSAGE!
GEOGRAPHICAL FILTEI
11011
within 2 miles (3 kr
within 3 miles (5 kr
within 6 miles (10 kr
within 30 miles (50 km)
"MUSIC" MEN
2
SELECT MUSI
2
SOUND SETTING:
3
balance/fade
?
bass/trebl
3
equalize
m = 311
NOTE
m = 311
classica
m = 311
jazz
m = 311
rock/por
m = 311
techno
m = 311
voca
3
loudnes
3
initialise sound settings
"RADIO" MEN
2
WAVEBAN
3
H
3
AI
2
MANUAL TUN
2
SOUND SETTING:
3
balance/fade
3
bass/trebl
3
equalize
4
HOUR
A
classice
6
jazz
A
rock/por
A
technic
•
voca
3
loudnes
3
initialise sound settings
"TELEPHONE" MEN
DIAL NUMBE
DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOO
CALL LIST
CONNECT PHONE
search phon
phones connecte
disconnect phone
rename phone
delete pairing
delete all pairing:
snow details
SETTING
select ring tor
phone/ring tone volun
enter mailbox number
SETU
SYSTEM LANGUAG
deutsc
englis
espan
françai
italian
nederland
polsl
portugues
DATE AND TIM
set date and tim
date forma
time forma
DISPLA
brightnes
colol
pop titanium
toffe
blue stee
technogre:
dark blue
MAF colour
4 day mode for ma
4 night mode for maj
4 auto. day/night fc MAF
2 VEHICLE PARAMETER
vehicle information
4 alert log
status of function
2 UNIT
temperatur
4 celsiu!
4 fahrenhei
Distanc
km and l/10
km and km/
4 miles (mi) and MPC
2 SYSTEM PARAMETER
factory res
software versic
automatic scrolling
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the MyWay.
| QUESTION | ANSWER | SOLUTION |
| There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD CD changer...) | For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treb Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound source which may result in audible differences when changing sourc (radio, CD, CD changer...) | Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bas Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted t the sources listened to. It is advisable to se the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rea Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middl position, select the musical ambience "None and set the loudness correction to the "Active position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" positio in radio mode |
| The CD is ejecte automatically or is no played by the player | The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any auc data or contains an audio format which the player cannot plaThe CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is r recognised by the audio equipmen | - Check that the CD is inserted in the player right way up.- Check the condition of the CD: the CD canr be played if it is too damaged- Check the content in the case of a record CD: consult the advice in the Audio sectior- The audio equipment's CD player does r play DVDs.- Due to inadequate quality, certain record CDs will not be played by the audio systerr- The CD changer does not play MP3 CD |
| The CD player soun is poor | The CD used is scratched or of poor qualit | Insert good quality CDs and store them i suitable conditions. |
| The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitab | Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selectir an ambience. | |
| QUESTION | ANSWEF | SOLUTION |
| The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations dc not function (nc sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...). | The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehic is travelling. | Activate the RDS function to enable the syste to check whether there is a more powerft transmitter in the geographical area |
| The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) blo reception, including in RDS mode | This phenomenon is normal and does no indicate a failure of the audio equipment | |
| The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when goir through a car wash or into an underground car park | Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN deale | |
| Sound cut-outs o 1 to 2 seconds in radic mode. | During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequen permitting better reception of the statior | Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomend is too frequent and always on the same route |
| With the engine ofl the audio equipment switches off after a few minutes of use. | When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating tin depends on the battery chargeThe switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's batter | Start the vehicle's engine to increase the batte charge. |
| The TRAFFIC INFC box is ticked. However certain traffi c jam along the route are no indicated in real time | On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive tl traffi c information | Wait until the traffi c information is being receiv correctly (displaying of the traffi c informatic symbols on the map) |
| In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, ...) are listed for tl traffi c information | This phenomenon is normal. The system dependent on the traffi c information availabl | |
| The time taken to calculate a route sometimes seems longer than usual | The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/Dv is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is beir calculated. | Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stc the copying before starting the guidance function |
| The altitude is nc displayed. | On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes receive more than 4 satellites correctly | Wait until the system has started up completel Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least 4 satellites (long press on the MENU button, the select AUDIO/TELEPHONE DIAGNOSTICS, the GPS COVERAGE) |
| Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel, ...) or the weather the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may var. | This phenomenon is normal. The system dependent on the conditions of reception of the GPS signal. | |
| The route calculation i not successful | The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion toll roads on a toll motorway) | Check the exclusion criteria |
| There is a long waitir time after inserting a CE or SD card. | When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few second | This phenomenon is norma |
| I cannot connect m Bluetooth telephone | The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipme may not be visible | - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth funct is activated.- Check that your telephone is visible. |
USB PL
USING THE USB POR
The list of compatible equipment is available from dealers.
1
This unit consists of a USB port and Jack socket. It reads audio file format (.mp3, .ogg, .wma, .wav...) which are transmitted from portable equipment such as a digital player or a USB stick to your audio system, to be listened to via the vehicle's speakers
2
USB stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or lpo ^® o generation 5 or later
- the playlists accepted are of the ty m3u, .pls, .wpl.
- the lpc ^® lead is essentia
- navigation through the file base is means of the steering wheel controls
- the battery of the portable equipment can charge automatically
3
Other Ipo ^® players of earlier generation and players using the MTP protocol
- play via Jack-Jack lead or (not supplied)
- navigation through the file base is from the portable equipment
CONNECTING A USB STIC
1
Connect the stick to the port, direct or using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched on, the USB source i: detected as soon as it is connected. Play begins automatically after a delay which depends on the capacity of the USE stick.
The file formats recognised are .mp (mpeg1 layer 3 only), .wma (standard 1 only), .wav and .ogg
!
The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created on a period which depends on the capacity of the USB equipment. The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off each time a USB stick is connected
When connecting for the first time, the tracks are classified by fol. When you reconnect, the classification system selected previously retained.
USB PLAYE
USING THE USB POR
Press and hold LIST to display the different classifi cations Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlis press OK to select the classifi catic required, then press OK again to confirm
- by Folder: all folders containing au fi les recognised on the peripher device, classified in alphabetical order without following the flow char
- by Artist: all of the artist nam defined in the ID3 Tags, classified alphabetical order
- by Genre: all of the genres defined the ID3 Tags
- by Playlist: in accordance with tl playlists recorded on the USB device.
Press LIST briefly to display the of Folders/Genres/Artists/Playlists or the USB equipment. Navigate through the list using th left/right and up/down buttons Confir rm the selection by pressing OI
Press one of these buttons to gai access to the previous/next track or the classification list currently be in played.
Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind play
Press one of these buttons to gai access to the previous/next Genre Folder, Artist or Playlist on th classifi cation list currently bein played.
CONNECTING AN IPOI® VIA THE USB PORT
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defined on iPod ^® ) Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 5 above.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB devices other than audio equipment to the USB port This could damage your installation
USB PLA
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX JACK SOCKET OR RCA SOCKET (according to veh
The auxiliary input, JACK and RCA, permits the connection portable equipment (MP3 player...);
Do not connect a single piece of equipment to the USB socket at the JACK socket at the same time
Connect the portable equipment (MP3 player.. to the JACK socket or to the audio sockets (whit and red, RCA type) using a suitable cable (no supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select AUX
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE AUXILIARY SOUF
First adjust the volume of your portable equipment.
Then adjust the volume of your audi equipment.
The controls are displayed and managed via the portable equipment
BLUETOOTH FUNCTION
BLUETOOTH TELEPHO! SCREEN C
(AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON MODEL AND VERSION)
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment usec
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out wh services are available to you. A list of mobile telephones which offer tl best range of services is available from the network, contact your deal
PAIRING A TELEPHON
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth system of your audio equipment should only carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on
Press the MENU buttor
2 Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
In the menu, selec
- Bluetooth telephone function - Au
- Bluetooth confi gurati
- Perform a Bluetooth sear
! The TELEPHONE menu gives access to the following functions particular: Directory *, Call list, Pairing manageme
* if your telephone hardware is fully compati
6 Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only or telephone can be connected at a time
7 A virtual keypad is displayed on the scree enter a code with at least 4 digits Confir rm by pressing OI OK
8 A message is displayed on the screen of the telephone chosen: to accept the pairing, ente the same code on the telephone, then confi rm t pressing OK. If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limite
9 "Pairing of Name_telephone successful" appears on the scree
10 The automatic connection authorised is only active after the telephone has been configured. The directory and the call list can be accessed after the synchronisation period
The pairing can also be initiated from the telephone.
BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMIN (AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON MODEL AND VERSION)
RECEIVING A CAL
1 An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display on the multifunction screen
Select the YES tab on the scree using the buttons and confirm t pressing OK.
YES
Press TEL or OK on the steering wheel controls to accept the call.
MAKING A CAL
1 From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage the telephone call then call, call list or directory
Press the TEL steering wheel control, or press ar hold OK for access to your directory O To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad, w the vehicle stationary
! Wireless transmission of the telephone's music fi les via the au equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriat bluetooth profi les (Profi les A2DP/AVRCI
1 Initiate the pairing between the telephone at the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated for the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 10 on the previous pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle must be stationary with the ignition or
2 Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function menu The audio system connects to a newly pair telephone automatically
Activate the streaming source b pressing the SOURCE button *. TI tracks to be played can be controlled as usual via the buttons on the Radi control panel and the steering wheel controls **. The contextual information can be displayed on the screen
* In certain cases, playing of the Audio fi les must be initiated from the ** If the telephone supports the funct
CHECKS
HDi 173
V6 HDi 240
HDi 173 - V6 HDi 240 engines (with particle filter)
- Screen wash and headlamp wash reservoir.
- Power steering and suspension fluid reservoir.
- Engine coolant reservoir.
- Engine oil dipstick.
- Engine oil fi ller cap.
- Air fi Iter.
- Brake fluid reservoir.
- Battery.
- "+" and "-" terminals for starting with a slave battery.
The diesel fuel system being under high pressure:
- Any intervention on the system is prohibited.
- HDi engines are the result of advanced technology.
Any intervention requires special qualifications which only a CITROËN dealer can guarantee.
COMFORT
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (I
Dual-zone: this is the differentiated regulation of the temperature and air distribution on the driver's side and the front passenger side.
The driver and his front passenger can each adjust the temperature and the distribution of the air to suit their requirements.
The symbols and messages associated with the automatic air conditioning controls appear on the multifunction screen.
1a. Automatic operation on the driver's side
1b. Automatic operation on the passenger's side
2a. Temperature adjustment on the driver's side
2b. Temperature adjustment on the passenger's side
3a. Air distribution adjustment on the driver's side
3b. Air distribution adjustment on the passenger's side
4a. Driver's zone display
4b. Passenger's zone display
5. Air flow adjustment
6. Activation/deactivation of the air conditioning
7. Air recirculation – intake of exterior air
8. Rear demisting - defrosting
9. Front demisting - defrosting
1a-1b. Automatic operation
This is the normal system operating mode. In accordance with the level of comfort chosen, pressing this control, confirmed by the display
of indicator lamp A, permits automatic and simultaneous control of all of the following functions:
- Air flow.
- Temperature in the passenger compartment.
- Air distribution.
- Air conditioning.
- Automatic air recirculation.
It is advisable to leave all of the vents open. Simply pressing one of the controls, with the exception of temperature regulation 1a and
1b, switches the system to manual mode. Indicator lamp A switches off.
COMFORT
2a-2b. Temperature adjustment
Turn control 2a to change the temperature on the driver's side and control 2b to change the temperature on the passenger's side: to the right to increase the temperature or to the left to reduce it.
The setting required is displayed.
The value indicated on the display corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the screen configuration.
A setting around the value 21 usually makes it possible to obtain optimum comfort. However, depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is usual.
On entering the vehicle, the interior temperature may be much colder (or warmer) than is comfortable. There is no need to change the temperature displayed in order to quickly obtain the level of comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air conditioning will use its maximum performance settings to correct the temperature difference as quickly as possible.
Control via the manual controls
Press one of the controls, with the exception of temperature regulation 2a and 2b. The indicator lamps A on the "AUTO" controls switch off.
It is possible to adjust one or more functions manually while leaving the other functions in automatic mode.
Switching to manual mode may result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation) and may not provide optimum comfort.
To return to "AUTO" mode, press controls 1a and 1b. The indicator lamps A come on.
3a-3b. Air distribution adjustment
Press control 3a to change the distribution of the air flow on the driver's side.
Press control 3b to change the distribution of the air flow on the passenger's side.
The indicator lamps corresponding to the distribution chosen come on:
- Windscreen and front side windows.
- Front ventilation (central and side vents and air diffusion grille if open) and rear ventilation.
- Front and rear footwells.
Simultaneous display of the distribution of air to the windscreen and side windows and of front and rear ventilation is not possible.
COMFORT
5. Air flow adjustment
Press the control: - to increase the air flow, - to reduce the air flow.
The air flow level is indicated by the progressive light-
ing of the fan blade indicator lamps. Reducing the flow to minimum switches the air conditioning OFF.
To prevent condensation and deterioration of the quality of the air in the passenger compartment, ensure that an adequate flow of air is maintained.
6. Air conditioning
The air conditioning will only operate when the engine is running. The air blower control (air flow adjustment) must be active in
order to obtain air conditioning.
Press control 6. The indicator lamp comes on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning must be used with the windows closed.
7. Air recirculation - intake of exterior air
Automatic air intake mode
It is activated by default in automatic comfort regulation.
Automatic mode is activated with reverse gear or operation of the screenwash.
This function permits recirculation of the air and isolation the passenger compartment from exterior fumes and odours. It is inactive when the ambient temperature is below +5°C to avoid the risk of misting inside the vehicle.
Closing the air intake
Press control 7 to close the exterior air intake.
While retaining the other settings, this position allows the driver to isolate the passenger compartment at any time from unpleasant exterior odours and fumes.
It must be cancelled as soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in the passenger compartment and demisting.
Intake of exterior air
Press control 7 once to open the exterior air intake.
FITTINGS
BOOT FITTINGS (SALC
natural_image
Close-up of a car trunk with two yellow circular markers labeled 1 and 2, showing interior design (no text or symbols beyond labels)-
Battery for vehicles with V6 HDi engine.
-
Boot floor (spare wheel storage).
natural_image
Exterior view of a car trunk with highlighted compartments and numbered parts (no text or symbols)-
Boot lamp.
-
Location for 6 CD changer.
Luggage securing rings
Use the 4 securing rings on the boot floor to secure your luggage.
For safety reasons in the event of sharp braking, you are advised to place heavy objects as far forward in the boot as possible.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
CHANGING A
Access to the tools
natural_image
Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical device showing internal components (no text or symbols)The tools are to be found in a protective holder inside the spare wheel.
Pull back the retaining strap for access.
List of tools
- Wheelbrace
- Jack
-
Tool for the removal/refitting of bolt protectors
-
Centring guide
- Towing eye
- Moveable chock (depending on equipment)
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Access to the spare wheel
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel showing yellow directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)To remove the spare wheel
Lift up the boot floor and fold in two (Saloon) or hook it using the retractable handle (Tourer).
Detach the strap then push the wheel forwards so as to be able to lift it.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the hood, vent, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)To reposition the spare wheel
Position the spare wheel flat in the boot, then pull it towards you.
Next place the toolbox inside the wheel, then secure the assembly with the strap.
Release the boot floor to return it to its initial position.
The tyre pressure is indicated on the label located on the left-hand door centre pillar. On this label, the tyre pressures are given, according to the vehicle loading.
TECHNICAL DATA
| MODELS: | ENGINES AND GEARBOXES | ||||||
| Model codes: RD... RW.... | 9HZC 9HZC/1 | RHF8 | RHRJ | 4HTH 4HPH | X8ZA | ||
| DIESEL ENGINES | 1.6 litre HDi 110 hp | 2 litre HDi 140 hp | 2 litre HDi 138 hp | 2.2 litre HDi 173 hp | 3 litre V6 HDi 240 hp | ||
| Cubic capacity (cc) | 1 560 | 1 997 | 2 179 | 2 992 | |||
| Bore x stroke (mm) | 75 x 88.3 | 85 x 88 | 85 x 96 | 84 x 90 | |||
| EU standard maximum power (kW) | 80 | 103 | 100 | 125 | 177 | ||
| Maximum power engine speed (rpm) | 4 000 | 4 000 | 4 000 | 3 800 | |||
| EU standard maximum torque (Nm) | 240 | 320 | 370 | 450 | |||
| Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) | 1 750 | 2 000 | 1 500 | 1 600 | |||
| Fuel | Diesel | Diesel | Diesel | Diesel | |||
| Catalytic converter | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | |||
| Particle emission filter (PEF) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | |||
| GEARBOXES | Manual (5-speed) | Manual (6-speed) | Auto. (6-speed) | Manual (6-speed) | Auto. (6-speed) | ||
| OIL CAPACITIES (in litres) | |||||||
| Engine (with filter replacement) | 3.75 | 5.25 | 5.25 | - | |||
| Gearbox - Final drive | 1.9 | - | - | - | - | ||
During the year.
TECHNICAL DATA
| FUEL CONSUMPTION (SALOON) | In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE | |||||
| Diesel engines | Gearboxes | Model codes: RD... | Urban Litres/100 km (mpg) | Extra-urban Litres/100 km (mpg) | Combined Litres/100 km (mpg) | CO emmissions (g/km) |
| 1.6 litre HDi 110 hp Airdream | Manual | 9HZC/1 | 6.6 (42.8) | 4.6 (61.4) | 5.3 (53.3) | 140 |
| 1.6 litre HDi 110 hp | Manual | 9HZC | 7.3 (38.7) | 4.7 (60.1) | 5.6 (50.4) | 149 |
| 2 litre HDi 140 hp | Manual | RHF8 | 7.5 (37.7) | 4.8 (58.9) | 5.8 (48.7) | 153 |
| 2 litre HDi 138 hp | Auto. | RHRJ | 9.9 (28.5) | 5.5 (51.4) | 7.1 (39.8) | 189 |
| 2.2 litre HDi 173 hp | Manual | 4HTH 4HPH | 8.8 (32.1) | 5.2 (54.3) | 6.5 (43.5) | 172 |
| 3 litre V6 HDi 240 hp | Auto. | X8ZA | 10.2 (27.7) | 5.8 (48.7) | 7.4 (38.2) | 195 |
The fuel consumption figures shown here correspond to the values communicated at the time of printing.
These fuel consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending on the style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and the use of vehicle systems.
During the year.
TECHNICAL DATA
| FUEL CONSUMPTION (TOURER) | In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE | |||||
| Diesel engines | Gearboxes | Model codes: RW... | Urban Litres/100 km (mpg) | Inter-urban Litres/100 km (mpg) | Combined Litres/100 km (mpg) | CO emissions (g/km) |
| 1.6 litre HDi 110 hp Airdream | Manual | 9HZC/1 | 6.6 (42.8) | 4.6 (61.4) | 5.3 (53.3) | 140 |
| 1.6 litre HDi 110 hp | Manual | 9HZC | 7.4 (38.2) | 4.8 (58.9) | 5.7 (49.6) | 150 |
| 2 litre HDi 140 hp | Manual | RHF8 | 7.6 (37.2) | 4.9 (57.6) | 5.9 (47.9) | 155 |
| 2 litre HDi 138 hp | Auto. | RHRJ | 10.0 (28.2) | 5.6 (50.4) | 7.2 (39.2) | 191 |
| 2.2 litre HDi 173 hp | Manual | 4HTH 4HPH | 8.9 (31.7) | 5.3 (53.3) 6.6 (42.8) | 175 | |
| 3 litre V6 HDi 240 hp | Auto. | X8ZA | 10.2 (27.7) | 5.8 (48.7) | 7.4 (38.2) | 195 |
The fuel consumption figures shown here correspond to the values communicated at the time of printing.
These fuel consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE They may vary depending on the style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and the use of vehicle systems.
During the year.
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg
| Diesel engines | 1.6 l. HDi 110 hp | 2 l. HDi 140 hp | 2 l. HDi 138 hp | 2.2 litre HDi 173 hp | 3 litre V6 HDi 240 hp | |
| Gearboxes | Manual | Manual | Auto. | Manual | Auto. | |
| Model codes: RD... | 9HZC | 9HZC/1 | RHF8 | RHRJ | 4HTH 4HPH | X8ZA |
| - Unladen weight | 1 503 | 1 485 | 1 608 | 1 658 | 1 729 | 1 766 |
| - Kerb weight | 1 578 | 1 560 | 1 683 | 1 733 | 1 804 | 1 841 |
| - Payload | 537 | 560 | 547 | 532 | 487 | 510 |
| - Gross vehicle weight (GVW) | 2 040 | 2 045 | 2 155 | 2 190 | 2 216 | 2 276 |
| - Gross train weight (GTW) | 3 140 | 3 145 | 3 755 | 3 490 | 3 816 | 3 676 |
| - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient | 1 100 | 1 600 | 1 300 | 1 600 | 1 400 | |
| - Braked trailer** (with load transfer within GTW limit) | 1 370 | 1 820 | 1 560 | 1 820 | 1 650 | |
| - Unbraked trailer | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 | |
| - Recommended nose weight | 55 | 73 | 63 | 73 | 67 | |
During the year.
*The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the exterior temperature is higher than 37 ^ , limit the weight towed.
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg
| Diesel engines | 1.6 litre HDi 110 hp | 2 litre HDi 140 hp | 2 litre HDi 138 hp | 2.2 litre HDi 173 hp | 3 litre V6 HDi 240 hp |
| Gearboxes | Manual | Manual | Auto. | Manual | Auto. |
| Model codes: RW... | 9HZC 9HZC/1 | RHF8 | RHRJ | 4HTH 4HPH | X8ZA |
| - Unladen weight 1 537 1 655 | 1 695 1 765 | 1 802 | |||
| - Kerb weight | 1 612 | 1 730 1 770 | 1 840 1 877 | ||
| - Payload | 641 | 621 | 631 | 587 | 571 |
| - Gross vehicle weight (GVW) | 2 178 | 2 276 2 326 | 2 352 2 373 | ||
| - Gross train weight (GTW) | 3 178 | 3 776 3 526 | 3 952 3 676 | ||
| - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient | 1 000 | 1 500 | 1 200 | 1 600 | 1 300 |
| - Braked trailer** (with load transfer within GTW limit) | 1 300 1 800 | 1 500 | 1 900 1 600 | ||
| - Unbraked trailer | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 | 750 |
| - Recommended nose weight | 52 | 72 | 60 | 77 | 64 |
During the year.
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C , limit the weight towed.
- INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
- PETROL - DIESEL MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC GEARBOX INSTRUMENT PANELS
- "Choice of units" menu
- "Choice of language" menu
- "Vehicle parameters" menu
- "Lighting" menu
- "Comfort" menu
- TRIP COMPUT
- A few definitions...
- Return to the main instrument panel screen display
- Log of alerts
- Display of navigation information on instrument panel screen
- When the ignition is switched on
- Operation indicator lights
- Deactivation warning lights
- Passenger's air bag system deactivation
- Front passenger's airbag activation
- Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR) deactivation
- Warning lights Diesel engine pre-heating
- Central alert
- Service
- Braking
- Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
- Parking brake
- Electronic parking brake fault
- Electronic parking brake - deactivation of automatic functions
- Dynamic stability control (ESP/ASR)
- Engine autodiagnostics system
- Maximum coolant temperature
- Fuel low
- Battery charge
- Seat belt not fastened/unfastened \*
- Seat belt non-fastening/unfastening
- Maintenance indicator
- More than 620 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due
- Service overdue
- Maintenance indicator zero reset
- Engine oil level indicator
- Oil level correct
- Lack of oil
- Oil level gauge fault
- Total distance recorder
- Trip distance recorder
- Lighting rheostat
- Operation
- Deactivation
- MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS
- MULTIFUNCTION SCRE
- Presentation
- Time
- Controls
- Main Menu
- Personalisation-Configuration
- Radio-CD
- Bluetooth® hands-free kit
- Adjusting the brightness and contrast
- Adjusting the date and the time
- Choosing the units
- Selection of the type of information displayed (Mode)
- Displays on the screen
- Languages
- Date and time
- Units
- System parameters
- Display
- "SETUP" menu
- Languages and voice functions
- COMFORT
- VENTILA
- VENTILATION, HE AND AIR CONDITIONING RECOMMENDATIONS
- Air conditioning
- Air inlet
- Air circulation
- Dust filter/Odour filter (active carbon)
- AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (
- Automatic operation
- Temperature adjustment
- Control via the manual controls
- Air distribution adjustment
- Air conditioning
- Air flow adjustment
- Switching off the ventilation
- To reactivate the air conditioning:
- Front demisting - de-icing
- Rear demisting - de-icing
- Intake of exterior air/Recirculation of interior air
- 1a-1b. Automatic operation
- 2a-2b. Temperature adjustment
- 3a-3b. Air distribution adjustment
- Reducing the flow to minimum switches the air conditioning OFF.
- Air conditioning
- Air recirculation - intake of exterior air
- Intake of air in automatic anti-pollution mode
- Closing the air intake
- Intake of exterior air
- Rear demisting - de-icing
- Front demisting - de-icing
- PROGRAMMABLE HEATING
- Digital programmer
- Setting the time
- Adjusting the operating duration
- Adjusting the remaining operating duration
- Immediate start-up
- Programming the start-up time
- Selection and activation of the programmed heating start-up time
- Cancelling the current programme
- Stopping the heating system while operating
- Reading the time
- Precautions in use:
- FRONT
- MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS
- ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
- Adjustment of the seat height and angle, and longitudinal adjustment
- Adjustment of the backrest angle
- Adjustment of the angle of the top of the backrest
- Adjustment of lumbar support
- Heated seats control
- Head restraint height and angle adjustments on electric seats
- Massage function The Welcome function
- Storing driving positions
- Storing a position
- Using buttons M/1/2
- Recalling a stored position
- Ignition on or engine running
- REAR HEAD RESTRAI
- REARS
- Removing the seat cushion
- Refitting the seat cushion
- Folding the seat
- Returning the seat back to its original position
- Adjustment
- Folding
- Unfolding
- Automatic tilting in reverse gear
- Programming
- Switching on
- Switching off
- Manual model
- Day/night position
- STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
- ACCESS
- REMOTE CONTR
- Unfolding the key
- Complete unlocking using the remote control
- Complete unlocking using the key
- Selective unlocking using the remote control
- Electric boot opening
- Locking the vehicle
- Normal locking using the remote control
- Normal locking using the key
- Deadlocking using the remote control
- Deadlocking using the key
- Locating your vehicle
- Guide-me-home lighting Anti-theft protection
- Electronic engine immobiliser
- "S": Steering lock
- "M": Drive position
- "D": Starter
- Steering lock
- Key in ignition buzzer
- STOPPING
- e Vehicles equipped with a S. turbocharger
- Malfunction
- Reinitialisation
- Changing the battery
- Lost keys
- Remote control
- Anti-theft protection
- When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
- ALAI
- Exterior protection
- Interior protection
- Anti-tamper function
- Locking the vehicle with full alarm
- Activation
- Locking the vehicle with exterior protection alarm only
- Deactivation of the interior protection
- Reactivation of the interior protection
- Triggering
- Failure of the remote control
- Locking the vehicle without alarm
- Automatic operation \*
- ELECTRIC WII
- One-touch electric windows
- Safety auto-reverse
- Deactivation of the rear electric window and door controls
- DC
- Opening
- Manual centralised control
- Locking
- Unlocking
- Automatic centralised control
- Emergency control
- Locking the driver's door
- Unlocking the driver's door
- Unlocking the front and rear passenger doors
- BOOT (SALOC)
- Locking/unlocking Tailgate release
- BOOT (TOURI
- Manual opening
- Electric opening
- Manual closing
- Electric closing
- Locking/unlocking
- Interrupting the opening/closing of the boot
- Memorisation of an intermediate position
- Cancelling the memorisation
- Electrical protection of the motor
- PANORAMIC SUN (SALOON)
- Sun roof closed
- Sun roof open
- Tilted sun roof
- Anti-pinch
- Closing
- Low fuel level
- Opening the fuel flap
- Refuelling
- Fuel quality
- BioFlex engine
- VISIBILITY
- LIGHTING CONT
- Main lighting
- Additional lighting
- Displays
- Lights on buzzer
- Daytime-running lamps
- Manual guide-me-home lighting
- Automatic lighting
- Linked with the automatic "Guide-me-home" lighting
- Operating fault
- MANUAL ADJUSTMENT THE HEADLAMPS
- AUTOMATIC ADJUSTI OF THE DIRECTIONAL HEADLAMPS
- DIRECTIONAL LIGHTI
- "Bend lighting" function
- Directional headlamps function
- WIPER CONTR
- Manual controls
- Windscreen wipers
- Reverse gear
- Windscreen and headlamp wash
- Automatic windscreen wiping
- COURTESY L
- Map reading lights
- Panoramic glass roof rear reading lights (Tourer)
- AMBIENT LIGH
- Central console
- DOOR LIGHTING
- WELCOME LIGHTING
- LAYOUT
- SUN VISOR
- AIR CONDITIONED GLOVEBOX
- SKI FLAP
- To open
- MATS
- Removing
- Refi tting
- FRONT ARMREST
- Cup-holder
- Storage
- BOOT LAYOUT (SALC
- Luggage securing rings
- BOOT LAYOUT (TOUF
- Hook
- Torch
- Luggage-cover blind
- Luggage securing rings
- Hooks
- Boot lamp
- 12 V accessories socket (100 W maximum)
- Loading assistance
- Hook
- Storage net or 6 CD changer
- Installation
- CHILD SAFETY
- GENERAL POINTS RELA TO CHILD SEATS
- INSTALLING A CHILD SEAT USING A THREE POINT SEAT BELT
- "Rearwards-facing"
- "Forwards-facing"
- CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN
- CHILD SEATS FITTED BY MEANS OF THE VEHICLE SEA
- "ISOFIX" MOUI
- In the front
- In the rear
- Saloon
- Tourer
- ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS
- Installing a booster seat
- ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEI
- ELECTRIC CHILD LO
- SAFETY
- DIRECTION INDICA
- "Motorway" function
- HAZARD WARNING LIG
- Automatic lighting of hazard warning lights
- H
- DEFLATION DETEC1
- Choice of detection
- Automatic detection
- Driver request detection
- Display of tyres in good condition
- Deflated tyre
- Automatic detection:
- Driver request detection:
- Anti-lock braking system and electronic brake force distribution
- Emergency braking assistance
- TRAJECTORY COI SYSTEMS
- Anti-skid regulation (ASR) and electronic stability programme (ESP)
- Snow driving assistance (SNOW MOTION)
- Disarming
- Reactivation
- Front seat belts
- Fastening
- Rear seat belts
- Unfastening
- Recommendations for children
- AIR BAGS
- The air bags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.
- Front air bags
- For the air bags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
- Side air bags
- Curtain air bags
- Side air bags \*
- Curtain air bags \*
- DRIVING
- Release
- Application
- - AUTOMATIC
- Automatic operation
- Application with the engine off
- Application with the engine running
- Activation/Deactivation of the automatic functions
- Manual operation
- Maximum application
- Maximum application is essential:
- Particular situations
- Dynamic emergency braking
- Emergency unlocking
- Operating anomalies
- SITUATION
- HILL START ASS
- Starting the vehicle
- Engaging reverse gear
- For safety:
- Moving off
- Park
- Neutral
- SNOW programme " \* "
- Return to automatic operation
- SPORT programme "S"
- FIXED CENTRED CONTROLS STEERING WHE
- SPEED LIMIT
- Overriding the programmed speed
- Return to normal driving
- CRUISE CONTR
- Displays on the instrument panel
- Steering wheel switches
- Adjustment of the memorised speed while cruise control is in operation
- Suspension/Resumption
- LANE DEPARTU WARNING SYSTEM
- Detection
- PARKING SPACE SENS
- VISUAL AND AUDIE FRONT AND/OR REAR PARKING ASSISTANCE
- Display on the instrument panel
- Normal mode
- SPORT mode
- Position not authorised
- CHECKS
- BOI
- DRAINING THE DIESEL F FILTER
- Protective cover
- HDi 138 engine
- HDi 110, HDi 173 and V6 HDi 208 engines
- Draining water from the fuel filter
- Priming the fuel circuit
- V6 HDi 208 engine with electric pump
- PETROL EN
- litre V6 petrol engine
- DIESEL EN
- HDi 173 - V6 HDi 208 engines (with particle filter)
- CHEC
- Oil level
- Dipstick
- Draining the engine
- Brake fluid level
- Draining the circuit
- Fluid specification
- Power steering fluid or power steering and suspension fluid level
- Oil specifi cation
- Coolant level
- Fluid specifi cation
- Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
- Diesel additive level (Diesel engine with particle emission filter)
- Topping up
- Used products
- Battery
- Air filter and passenger compartment filter
- Oil filter
- Particulate filter system (Diesel)
- Manual gearbox
- Automatic gearbox
- Brake disc wear status
- Handbrake
- Brake pads
- PRACTICAL INFORMATION
- PUNCTURE REPAIR
- Using the kit
- CHANGING A
- Access to the tools
- List of tools
- Access to the spare wheel
- To remove the spare wheel
- To reposition the spare wheel
- Before positioning the jack:
- Fitting a wheel
- Deflation detection
- Anti-theft bolts
- CHAN
- Headlamps
- Changing sidelamps
- Risk of electrocution
- Changing dipped beams
- Changing the directional lighting
- Changing direction indicators
- Changing front foglamps
- Changing side repeaters
- Spotlamp
- CHANGIN
- Replacing a fuse
- Fuses under the dashboard
- Access to the fuses
- BAT
- Charging the battery using a battery charger
- Before disconnecting the battery
- Following reconnection of the battery
- ENERGY ECONOMY MO
- Switching to economy mode
- Exiting economy mode
- TOWING THE VEHIC
- TOWING A TRAILEF CARAVAN, ETC.
- Driving advice
- Distribution of loads
- Side wind
- Cooling
- Tyres
- Lights
- ROOF B.
- Recommendations
- VERY COLD PROTECTIC
- Normal situation
- Snow situation
- SNOW GUA
- Fitting
- Remove
- ACCESSORIES
- TECHNICAL DATA
- Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines
- Quality of the fuel used for Diesel engines
- IDENTIFICATION F
- Autora
- CONTENTS
- FIRST STEPS
- GENERAL MI 02
- AUI
- RADI SELECTING A STATIO
- RD
- C[
- PLAYING A C
- MF
- PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATIO
- CD CHANG PLAYING A CD (NOT MP3 COMPATIBL)
- USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (JACK/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIE
- ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE AUXILIARY SOURCE
- 04
- HANDS-FREE
- MATCHING A TELEPHON
- !
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
- RECEIVING A CAL
- [Non-Text]
- MAKING A CAL
- The image contains a graphical symbol resembling a light bulb with a starburst effect. There is no textual content to extract.
- CONTROL SHORT-CUTS
- STEERING WHEEL CONTROL:
- 06
- CONFIGURA
- ADJUSTING THE DAT AND TIME
- 07
- DISPLAY FLOW CHART monochrc
- FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
- NaviDrive 3C
- NaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL
- FIRST STEPS 01
- NaviDrive 3D NAVIGATO
- DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
- GENERAL OPERATION 02 DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEX
- NA1
- TEL
- MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
- RADIC
- GENERAL OPERATION DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEX
- MAF
- AUDIO DVE
- VIDEO DVC
- NAVIGATION - GUIDANCI
- ROUTE OPTION
- ADDING A STOPOVE
- SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTERES
- UPDATING THE HAZARDOUS LOCATIO POIs
- SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTING
- POINTS OF INTEREST AND HAZAR LOCATIONS SETTINGS
- TRAFFIC INFORMATIC
- CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AN DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES
- RADIC
- SELECTING A STATIO
- RDS - REGIONAL MODE - TRAFFIC INFO
- SELECTING/PLAYIN CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/USB READ
- USING THE EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX) AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
- JUKEBO COPYING A CD, A USB STICK OR AN SD CARD ONTO THE HARD DISC
- JUKEBO》 RENAMING AN ALBUI
- MAKING A TELEPHONE CALI
- CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOT TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE
- CONNECTING A BLUETOOTI TELEPHONE
- MAKING A TELEPHONE CA
- USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHON WITH SIM CARD
- EMERGENCY CAL EXCEPT NaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL
- CONSULTING THE SERVI
- CONFIGURATION
- SETTING THE DATE AND TIM
- VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING WHEEL CONTROL
- C5 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL
- VOICE COMMANDS VOICE RECO. INITIATION
- VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE RECO. INITIATION
- DISPLAY FLOW CHARTS
- MAIN FUNCTIO
- "TRAFFIC" MEN
- READING OF MESSAGE
- "MEDIA" MEN
- JUKEBOX MANAGEMEN
- VIDEO SETTING
- EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX) MANAGEMENT
- "RADIO" MEN
- "AUDIO SETTINGS" MEN
- CUT OUT REAR SPEAKER
- "NAVIGATION" MEN
- STOPOVER
- SEARCH FOR POINTS OF INTERES
- GUIDANCE OPTION
- NO.01
- "TELEPHONE" MEN
- SETTING:
- MyWay
- MY WAY CONTROL PANE
- On/Off
- SETUP
- TRAFFIC
- DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEX
- TRIP COMPUTER
- PHONE
- MAP:
- NAVIGATION SETTING
- TRAFFIC INFORMATIO
- SELECTING/PLAYING MUSI CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD
- PLAYING A CD (NOT MP3/WMA COMPATIBLE
- BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
- CONNECTING A TELEPHON
- #
- 5
- i
- TRIP COMPUTER/VEHICLE PARAMETERS
- VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC
- A FEW DEFINITION
- STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
- C4 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL
- Volume decrease
- SETTING
- SETU
- USB PL
- USING THE USB POR
- CONNECTING A USB STIC
- USB PLAYE
- CONNECTING AN IPOI® VIA THE USB PORT
- USB PLA
- USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX JACK SOCKET OR RCA SOCKET (according to veh
- ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE AUXILIARY SOUF
- BLUETOOTH FUNCTION
- BLUETOOTH TELEPHO! SCREEN C
- PAIRING A TELEPHON
- BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
- BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMIN (AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON MODEL AND VERSION)
- HDi 173 - V6 HDi 240 engines (with particle filter)
- AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (I
- FITTINGS
Brand : CITROEN
Model : C5 Dag (2008)
Category : Automotive